Untitled
Untitled
Untitled
Instruction Manual
Code
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II
Revision 0
Appendix_A_
Appendix_B_
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Imprint
© 2012
This Instruction Manual is protected by copyright
laws. It cannot be translated, duplicated (mechani-
cally or electronically) in whole or in part, or passed
on to third parties without the written approval of the
publisher.
Printed in Germany
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Version - Log
Version - Log
Version 1.00
- Amendments, exchange
of chapters/ sheets
of the instruction manual
- Addendums within an
instruction manual
- Complete
exchange of the whole
instruction manual
iii
General information on the
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Instruction Manual
Read this Instruction Manual carefully, to become familiar with the proper handling Reading the
and operation. Instruction Manual
The Instruction Manual must always be available at the installation side of the Geared Installation site
variable speed coupling.
The contents of this Instruction Manual are intended for various target groups. Definition of the
The level of knowledge that the target group must have is defined here. target groups
All target groups must have read this Instruction Manual and have a good
understanding of the content.
• be 18 years old.
• be trained in handling of the Geared variable speed coupling.
• know the country-specific accident prevention regulations.
• be 18 years old.
• know the maintenance points on the Geared variable speed coupling.
• know the country-specific environmental protection regulations for disposing
of lubricants and cleaning materials.
• be 18 years old.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
I
General information on the
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Instruction Manual
Our systems are under continual further development and improvements. The data Technical
contained in this edition corresponds with the latest technology. modifications
We reserve the right to any changes in technical details differentiating from the
information and images in the operating instructions.
Besides those regulations for accident prevention stipulated in the operating Accident prevention
instructions, those in the country of use and the installation location, the recognized regulations
technical regulations for safety and proper work practices are to be observed.
1 22
DANGER
Type of hazard 3
Hazard consequences 4
Hazard countermeasures
6 5
Type of hazard 3
DANGER
Hazard consequences 4
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Hazard countermeasures 5
1 2
1. Safety symbol
6. Safety sign
II
General information on the
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Instruction Manual
Notes
NOTE
Fonts are designated according to their functionality in the following ways: Font designations
III
General information on the
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Instruction Manual
Page structure:
1 2 3
5
6
7
8
1. Plant type
2. Code
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
3. Coupling size
4. Chapter designation
5. Text column
6. Marginal column
8. Page number
IV
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Contents
Contents
1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
V
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E
5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
VI
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E
5.11 Orifice holes for lube oil supply to external units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
6 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
7 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
7.4 Measures to take in the event of tailspin and rotation in the opposite direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
8 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
VII
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E
8.6 Test criteria and notes for evaluating working oils. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
9 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
VIII
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E
IX
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 1 Technical Data
1 Technical Data
Geared variable
Geared variable speed coupling as feed pump drive speed coupling
Direction of rotation viewed in direction of power flow.
• Input shaft CCW
• Hydr. circuit CW
• Output shaft CW
Weight:
• Total (without oil) 3600 kg
• Input shaft with gear 800 kg
• Primary-side components of the coupling runner with 200 kg
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
gear pinion
• Secondary-side components of the coupling runner 102 kg
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
1
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 1 Technical Data
Attaching parts
Main oil pump
Type ZP 240
Design type B5
Degree of protection IP 54
Type VSF 50
Grade of filtration 35 μm
Actuator
Control signal 4 - 20 mA
Connecting couplings
2
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 1 Technical Data
Design ---
Heat exchanger
Instruments
3
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 1 Technical Data
Temperatures
4
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 1 Technical Data
Pressures
Working oil pressure before the orifice (in working oil circuit)1 1.5 to 2.2 bar
Test connection II/M2 (see Assembly Plan)
Working oil pressure after the orifice (in working oil circuit) 0.2 to 0.5 bar
Test connection III/M3 (see Assembly Plan)
Pressure differential across duplex Switch and clean filter at > 0.6 bar
oil filter
Oil quantities
Vibrations - housing
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
These limits can be maintained only so long as there is no foundation resonance within the
speed range.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
5
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 1 Technical Data
Design data
Heat exchanger
Working oil / lube oil
Cooler max. pressure drop (oil side) 1.5 bar at cold start 0.8 bar at operating
temperature
Cooler design temerature (oil side) 130 °C working oil 80 °C lube oil
6
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
2 Safety information
The Geared variable speed coupling has been designed and manufactured using the Basic principle
latest technology and in accordance with accepted safety principles. Nevertheless, its
use can result in danger to life and limb of the user or damage to the equipment itself
and other property.
The Geared variable speed coupling is to be operated only if it is in proper working Use of the
condition and only for the designated use, in a safety-conscious manner that complies equipment
with the Instruction Manual, including knowledge of the associated dangers! Immedi-
ately correct any situations that adversely affect safety.
The Geared variable speed coupling is used to transmit power in a wear-free manner Use of the
from a prime mover (driving machine) to a power consumer (driven machine). Use the equipment
equipment only for the designated purpose.
Complying with designated use also means satisfying the manufacturer's require-
ments regarding operating conditions, maintenance and repair.
Use of the equipment for any other purpose is considered improper use. The manu-
facturer assumes no liability for damage arising from improper use; the risk associ-
ated with improper use is borne by the user.
The permissible power that can be transmitted by the coupling in a stationary installa-
tion for a given input speed, power input, direction of rotation, oil flow rate in external
machines, and oil reservoir content is specified in this Instructin Manual. Any other
use beyond that described herein, e.g. for higher power levels, higher speeds, possi-
bly lower speeds, with other operating fluids, under operating conditions that have not
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
7
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
The safety symbol is used to alert you to possible risk of personal injury. Heed all in-
structions following this symbol in order to avoid possible injury or death.
Indicates an immediate, potentially dangerous situation which – if the safety regula- Danger
tions are not observed – could result in death or serious bodily injury.
DANGER
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation which – if the safety regulations are not ob- Warning
served – could result in death or serious bodily injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation which – if the safety regulations are not ob- Caution
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
CAUTION
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
8
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation which – if the safety regulations are not ob- Caution - with safety
served – could result in damage to equipment. symbol
CAUTION
• Use a mild cleaning agent and water to clean the safety symbol.
The Instruction Manual and safety symbols described therein must be read and un-
derstood by all individuals who work on or with the Geared variable speed coupling.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
9
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
• The operator must provide additional specific safety instructions that reflect the lo-
cal operating conditions, if deemed to be necessary.
• This Instruction Manual and the safety information contained therein must be
stored in a safe location.
• This Instruction Manual and the safety information contained therein must be kept
in their entirety and in always legible condition.
• Prior to starting any work, familiarize yourself with first-aid and rescue procedures Prior to starting any
(how to contact a doctor, the fire department or rescue services in an emergency). work
• Familiarize yourself with the location and operation of fire extinguishers as well as
the location of fire alarm boxes and fire fighting equipment.
• Wear protective work clothing while working. Remove rings, shawls and open jack-
ets. For certain work, you must wear safety goggles, safety shoes, a safety helmet,
protective gloves, a reflecting vest , ear protection etc.
• Operate the Geared variable speed coupling only when it is in safe and functional
condition.
• If the above-mentioned liquids are seeping into the soil, you must stop their escape
immediately and treat the area with a liquid-binding absorbent. It may be neces-
sary to remove the soil.
• Dispose of the absorbent and any soil removed properly and in compliance with
applicable environmental protection regulations.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
10
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
This Instruction Manual contains important information regarding proper handling of instruction Manual
the Geared variable speed coupling. Before installing the equipment and especially
before commissioning the entire system, read the Instruction Manual carefully and en-
sure that it is understood.
Store the Instruction Manual such that it is available to the operating personnel at all
times.
In addition to the Instruction Manual: ensure that regulations regarding accident pre- Accident prevention /
vention and environmental protection are accessible and observed. environmental
protection
WARNING
NOTE
Additional components that are not supplied by Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG
must be inspected for internal or external damage and contamination (possibly
by silicone-containing sealing compunds) prior to being installed or attached.
Ensure proper operation.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
11
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
• Only properly trained and instructed personnel must be allowed to work on the Ge- Trained personnel
ared variable speed coupling. These personnel must be trained, instructed and au-
thorized to
– Operate and maintain the equipment properly and in a manner that ensures
compliance with safety standards
– Dispose of liquids and their associated components, e.g. filters, oil filter car-
tridges and oil, properly
– Service and use safety devices in a manner that ensures compliance with
safety standards
• Untrained, uninstructed and unschooled personnel as well as personnel currently Untrained personnel
receiving general training and instruction must not be allowed to perform any ac-
tions on the equipment unless they are under the continuous supervision of an ex-
perienced individual.
A Geared variable speed coupling that is not in proper operating condition can cause
personal injury and damage to equipment.
The operator is obligated to operate the Geared variable speed coupling only if it is in
proper operating condition.
Hazardous areas between the Geared variable speed coupling and customer's equip-
ment must be protected by the operator.
The Geared variable speed coupling generates heat that raises the temperature in the
immediate surroundings and may have an adverse affect on personnel. The operator
is obligated to always provide adequate ventilation.
When work is being performed on the equipment, the operator must provide adequate
illumination.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
After delivery of the equipment / machine, the operator must provide sufficient corro-
sion protection.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
12
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
Protection systems, interlocks and couplings on the system are to be inspected for
safe operation on a regular basis by a qualified specialist.
Areas on the housing of the coupling, working oil lines and the working oil cooler
reach surface temperatures > 60°C. Guarding to prevent contact with these areas is
not supplied with the coupling, since conditions at the subsequent installation site are
not known, and complete guarding to prevent contact can be cumbersome and se-
verely restrict access required for maintenance.
We recommend that, by taking suitable measures at the installation site, e.g. marking
aisles, installing warning signs and instructing personnel access be restricted to ar-
eas needed during normal operation. These include the instrument gauge panel and
the oil filters (for the required exchange of filter elements).
Assign only personnel with proper training or instruction, clearly designate the re-
sponsibilities for operation, adjustment, maintenance, repairs.
Regularly check that personnel maintain safety-conscious work habits in compliance Safety-conscious
with the Instruction Manual and are aware of the dangers involved. work
The personnel responsible for performing any work on the system must, prior to start- Reading the
ing such work, read the Instruction Manual, and the Safety information chapter in Instruction Manual
particular. Reading while performing the work is too late. This applies especially to
personnel who work on the system only occasionally, e. g. to perform maintenance on
the system.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
The Instruction Manual must always be kept in a readily accessible location at the in-
stallation site!
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
13
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
Heed all safety instructions and hazard notices on the system! Ensure that all safety Information on the
instructions and hazard notices on the system are present and in legible condition! system
Supplement the Instruction Manual with information about monitoring and reporting Special aspects of
obligations in order to account for special aspects of operation, e. g. with regard to or- operation
ganization of work, work procedures, assigned personnel.
The personnel are not allowed to have long, loose hair, or wear loose clothing or jew- Risk of injury
elry, including rings. These pose the risk of injury, e. g. by becoming caught in machin- arising from
ery. clothing and the like
Observe the adjustment, maintenance and inspection intervals, including replace- Maintenance
ment of parts, specified in the Instruction Manual! These activities may only be per-
formed by qualified individuals.
Inform personnel before starting to perform any special or maintenance work! Desig-
nate supervisors!
Comply with all procedures for switching equipment on and off specified in the Instruc- Switching on and off
tion Manual as well as instructions regarding servicing of equipment when performing
any work that involves operation or adjustment of the system and its safety devices or
inspection, maintenance or repair!
If the system has been switched off completely for maintenance and repair work, it Securing against
must be secured against being switched on again unexpectedly. being switched on
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications of the manufacturer. This is always Spare parts
assured by purchasing genuine Voith replacement parts.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Individual parts and larger assemblies are to be carefully fastened and secured to lift- Lifting appliances
ing gear when being exchanged so that no danger is posed. Use only suitable lifting
appliances and accessories that are in good condition and have the necessary load-
carrying capacity! Do not work or stop under suspended loads!
When performing assembly work above body height, use the provided or other safety Work performed
ascent aids and work platforms. Do not use parts of the system as ascent aids! above body height
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
Before starting maintenance/repair work, clean the system, especially connections Connections and
and threaded fittings, of oil, lubricants or similar substances! Do not use any aggres- threaded fittings
sive cleaning agents! Use lint-free cleaning rags!
14
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
Always tighten bolted connections when performing maintenance or servicing the Bolted connections
equipment!
If disassembly of safety devices is required when performing maintenance and re- Completion of
pairs, these safety devices are to be reassembled and checked for proper operation maintenance and
immediately after the completion of the maintenance and repair work. service work
Ensure that all operating fluids and replaced parts are disposed of safety and in an en-
vironmentally responsible manner!
In addition to the Instruction Manual, ensure that generally applicable as well as any
specific regulations regarding accident prevention and environmental protection are
observed and pointed out!
In the event of any system modifications that affect safety or any changes in the oper-
ation of the system, shut the system down immediately and notify the responsible
party/individuals of the malfunction!
Observe the specified deadlines for recurring maintenance/service work! Always en- Maintenance/service
sure that maintenance instructions and intervals are observed.
Keep access paths to areas needed for service work free of obstructions.
Servicing of the equipment requires tools that are appropriate for the work to be per-
formed.
The system must be disassembled only by qualified personnel who perform their work Relocating the
in compliance with local safety regulations. equipment
Suitably pack components that are subject to breakage, drain fluids where necessary.
Prior to disassembly for salvage purposes or scrapping, completely remove any oil or
other substances that pose a danger to water.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
15
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
DANGER
Danger to life
Use only new fuses rated for the specified current! Shut down the system immediately Electrical energy
in the event of problems with the electricity supply!
16
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
When handling oil and grease, observe the safety regulations that apply to the pro- Oil, grease and
duct! aerosols
Exercise caution when handling hot operating fluids and similar substances (risk of
burns and scalding)!
Escaping aerosols can be absorbed into the body via the skin, eyes and lungs, caus-
ing irritations or injuries. The operator is obligated to always provide adequate venti-
lation.
The danger area that arises at an interface to machinery from others must be pro-
tected by the operator.
Do not make any alterations, modifications or add any attachments to the system that Modifications
could affect safety before receiving approval from Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Crailsheim!
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
17
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
WARNING
Risk of injury
WARNING
Risk of injury
• Heed the identifying information and instructions on the containers and the pack-
aging of the cleaning agent.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
18
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
WARNING
Equipment damage
NOTE
Proper operation of the Geared variable speed coupling requires that the
instruments be functioning correctly.
19
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
• Immediately repair or exchange components that are not in perfect operating con-
dition. Use only genuine Voith replacement parts!
The working oil in the Geared variable speed coupling may be under pressure. Prior
to performing any maintenance or repair work, disconnect the equipment from the
electricity (observe local regulations!)
The housing, oil lines, connecting couplings and working oil may be very hot - in ex-
treme cases, up to 130°C. Contact can cause burns on the skin.
The Geared variable speed coupling must be allowed to cool prior to maintenance or
repair work!
When steam cleaning or using a stream of water under high pressure, dirt may be Cleaning
forced into the equipment.
Protect shaft seals (labyrinth seals) and breather filters on the Geared variable speed
coupling, so that the stream of water or steam does not strike them directly.
Note the following when disposing of used oil: Disposal of used oil
CAUTION
Environmental damage
20
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 2 Safety information
2.17 Warranty
The conditions specified in the general terms of delivery of Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.
KG Crailsheim apply with respect to warranty claims. Warranty claims will be rejected
if they are attributable to one or several of the following causes:
• Failure to comply with the instructions regarding occupational safety and product
safety contained in the Instruction Manual,
• Filling the Geared variable speed coupling with contaminated oil, with different oil
grades or with a grade that does not appear on the Voith-authorized list or is not
approved by Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG Crailsheim.
NOTE
During the warranty period, repairs to the Geared variable speed coupling may
be performed only with the approval of Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG Crailsheim.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
21
3 Design and Principle of
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Operation
3.1 Design
77 10
10 16
16
5 88
11
44 12 66
18
Illustration 3-1: Design of the Geared variable speed coupling (only partially shown)
pump
4 Primary shaft
22 Duplex oil filter
15 Auxiliary lubricating oil
5 Primary wheel
pump with electric motor 23 Lube oil cooler
6 Secondary shaft
16 Scoop tube 24 Working oil cooler
7 Secondary wheel
17 Scoop tube - actuator 25 Instruments
8 Shell
18 Control lever 26 Check valve
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
9 Working chamber
19 Orifice in working oil circuit
10 Scoop chamber
22
3 Design and Principle of
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Operation
The mechanical gearing and the coupling are combined in an enclosed housing. Housing
The oil reservoir is flange-mounted at the bottom of the housing.
The primary shaft and primary wheel are permanently attached to one another,
the same is true of the secondary wheel and secondary shaft. The primary shaft is
connected to the driving machine via the gear unit; the secondary shaft is connected
to the driven machine.
The primary wheel, secondary wheel and shell form the working circuit. The working
oil circulates within the working chamber.
The scoop tube with the scoop tube housing is integrated in the housing of the Geared
variable speed coupling. The secondary shaft is mounted in the scoop tube housing.
The gear unit contains the input shaft with a gear and the pinion gear shaft. The pinion Gear unit
gear shaft is connected with the primary shaft of the coupling.
All rotating parts have plain bearings and are lubricated. Bearings
The working oil and lube oil circuits are separate, but draw oil from the same oil Oil pumps
reservoir. The oil is pumped by the main oil pump and put into circulation.
The main oil pump, which pumps working oil and lubricating oil, is driven mechanically
by the input shaft of the Geared variable speed coupling.
The electrically driven auxiliary lube oil pump supplies the system with lube oil during
startup, shutdown and in the event of a malfunction.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
23
3 Design and Principle of
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Operation
The Geared variable speed coupling transmits power in a wear-free manner from
a driving machine to a driven machine. The power is transmitted in the following way:
The scoop tube control provides infinitely variable adjustment of the driven machine's
speed.
The power from the driving machine is transmitted to the primary wheel (function: Mechanical energy –
pump) to the working oil; the working oil is accelerated in the primary wheel, and the fluid flow energy
mechanical energy is converted into the energy of fluid flow. The secondary wheel
(function: turbine) picks up the flow energy and converts it into mechanical energy.
This energy is transmitted to the power consumer.
The torque at the primary wheel is identical to that at the secondary wheel.
Because of slip during power transmission, the speed of the secondary wheel (n2) Slip
is lower than that of the primary wheel (n1).
[s = (1-n2/n1) x 100 %]
The power loss resulting from the slip heats the working oil. To dissipate this heat,
the oil must be cooled.
Oil flows into the working circuit of the coupling via the orifice in the working oil circuit Working oil cooling
and forms a rotating ring of oil in the scoop chamber as a result of centrifugal force. circuit
The position of the scoop tube determines the height (thickness) of the oil ring in the
scoop chamber and thus the level of oil in the working chamber. The scoop picks up
the heated working oil in the scoop chamber and directs it to the working oil cooler.
There, it is cooled and put back into the coupling via the orifice. This completes the
circuit.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
If the amount of working oil in the coupling needs to be increased, the scoop tube is
adjusted and the main oil pump also pumps working oil from the oil reservoir into the
circuit via the sequence valve.
The orifice in the working oil circuit, along with the working oil pressure, determines Working oil flow rate
the working oil flow rate. Excess oil in the circuit is returned to the oil reservoir through
the pressure relief valve.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
The working oil pressure is adjusted at the pressure relief valve. Working oil
pressure
24
3 Design and Principle of
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Operation
The working oil temperature depends on the power loss (slip) and the working oil Working oil
recirculation rate. It is monitored by temperature sensors. temperature
If cooling water consumption in the working oil cooler is to be reduced, a temperature Oil temperature
control circuit for the working oil based on reducing the flow of cooling water can be control
provided.
If as the result of a malfunction the oil temperature rises to 160 °C1, the fusible plugs Fusible plugs
in the coupling melt, and oil is diverted into the housing of the Geared variable speed
coupling. The coupling empties and if the working oil pump does not supply any
additional oil, the equipment comes to a stop.
1. if the necessary oil temperature acts on the solder in the fusible plug together with a suitable oil
pressure.
25
3 Design and Principle of
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Operation
Illustration 3-2:
Speed control by means
16
of the scoop tube
31 16 Scoop tube
18 Control lever
31 Gear segment
32 Control shaft
32
18
18
The speed of the driven machine is infinitely variable. This is accomplished by varying
the amount of oil in the coupling during operation with the aid of the adjustable scoop
tube:
• Scoop tube advanced as far as possible into the scoop chamber of the coupling
(0 % position): minimum oil ring, minimum output speed.
• Scoop tube retracted as far as possible out of the scoop chamber of the coupling
(100 % position): maximum oil ring, maximum output speed.
The position of the scoop tube depends on the position of the control lever. The
control lever is connected with the actuator by a linkage. The control lever is adjusted
by the actuator.
The control lever is adjusted via the actuator in direction "Max. output speed" (100 %). Max. output speed
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
The control lever is adjusted via the actuator in direction "min. output speed" (0 %). Min. output speed
• The mechanical processes are the same as described previously. The direction of
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
26
3 Design and Principle of
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Operation
3.4 Lubrication
3.4.1 Self-lubrication
Bearings and gears of the Geared variable speed coupling require lubricating oil for
starting up, during operation and when shutting down.
During operation, the main oil pump delivers oil from the oil reservoir into the lube oil Lube oil circuit
circuit. At startup and shutdown, the auxiliary lube oil pump supplies the oil for
lubrication. The oil flows through
The lube oil flow rate for the bearings and gears is set by means of orifice plugs or Lube oil flow rate
orifice openings in the lube oil nozzles. Excess oil flows into the working oil circuit via
the sequence valve.
The lube oil flow rate can be altered only indirectly by means of the lube oil pressure.
The lubricating oil pressure is set at the sequence valve and is monitored with Lube oil pressure
pressure measuring devices (pressure gauge, transmitter, switch).
The lube oil temperature is monitored by temperature measuring devices. Lube oil
temperature
Controlling the oil temperature ensures good separation of air in the oil reservoir. Oil temperature
The following possibilities exist: control
– for smaller cooling water temperature fluctuations in the lube oil cooler
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
27
3 Design and Principle of
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Operation
The oil for lubrication of the driving machine, the driven machine and/or the
connecting couplings is drawn from the lube oil circuit of the Geared variable speed
coupling and returned to the oil reservoir of the Geared variable speed coupling.
The lube oil pressure and lube oil flow rate are set with the aid of the orifices plugs on Lube oil pressure,
the flange connection of the Geared variable speed coupling and possibly with the aid lube oil flow rate
of the orifice plugs upstream of the respective lubrication points.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
28
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 4 Transport and Storage
The following safety information applies to the entire chapter. They must be observed
in addition to the various specific instructions.
As the result of inadequate packaging and securing, the coupling may have become
WARNING
unstable and could shift unintentionally, causing serious injury.
Unqualified personnel could misjudge the weight of the coupling. This could
WARNING
(for instance, as the result of selecting unsuitable lifting equipment) allow the load to
drop on someone underneath, resulting in serious injury or death and/or cause severe
damage to the coupling.
For weight data, see Section 1 „Technical Data“ and Section „Assembly Plan“.
Improper handling of the coupling, especially during transport by a crane, poses the
WARNING
risk of crushing and serious injury.
Impact hazard
The suspended and swinging coupling could strike someone and cause serious injury.
WARNING
Maintain a safe distance! Allow only knowledgeable personnel to handle transport!
The suspended and swinging coupling could rub against someone and cause friction
CAUTION
or abrasion wounds.
29
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 4 Transport and Storage
The Geared variable speed coupling cannot be used on its own in the as-delivered
condition.
• The Geared variable speed coupling is fully assembled and ready for installation. State of assembly
• All internal piping for the working oil and lube oil is in place.
• All external piping connections are provided in the form of welding neck flanges
with gaskets, and are sealed for protection during transport.
• If connecting couplings are being supplied by Voith or have been provided by the
customer, their hubs have been attached to the input and secondary shafts of the
Geared variable speed coupling.
• All instruments (gauges, switches etc.) are attached or installed in an instrument
panel. The panel is attached to the housing by means of vibration-absorbing
mounts.
• Electrical indicating instruments and switches are wired to a terminal strip in
a junction box.
• The instruments installed are identified.
• The actuator is installed and set.
Prior to shipment, the Geared variable speed coupling underwent a trial run at the Test run
Voith test facility.
1. Evaluation on the basis of DIN ISO 3945, Items. 0–7, and as prescribed in VDI 2056, Machinery
group T
30
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 4 Transport and Storage
The Geared variable speed coupling and all attached components have been treated
(preserved) and packed in a manner that provides protection for 12 months.
The internal surfaces of the Geared variable speed coupling have a light film of oil in Corrosion
the as-delivered condition (either from the oil used during the trial run or from having protection for
had solvent-free corrosion-inhibiting oil sprayed on as corrosion protection1). This film shipment within
of oil provides 12 months of protection within Europe, provided that the coupling is Europe
stored in a dry location.
For shipment overseas, the Geared variable speed coupling is additionally sealed in Corrosion
plastic film. Bags of desiccant inside the packaging absorb some of the humidity. protection for
Equipment packaged in this way can also be stored for 12 months in a dry location, shipment overseas
provided that the plastic film is not punctured or damaged.
For Geared variable speed couplings that are to be stored for periods of longer than Long-term
12 months, Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG Crailsheim offers special long-term corrosion preservation/corrosi
prevention with storage instructions after delivery. on protection
Appendix_A_ „Preservation method and instructions for storage after delivery 3625-
006714“
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
1. used by the factory as well as recommended Section „Internal corrosion-inhibiting oils“ on page 36
31
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 4 Transport and Storage
The Geared variable speed coupling is delivered in a transport framework, ready for
installation. If necessary, it is also protected by a crate. Both the coupling and the
crate have specified lifting points.
WARNING
Risk of injury
CAUTION
Equipment damage
NOTE
The lifting points provided on the Geared variable speed coupling are intended
only for the weight of the coupling itself.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
Do not lift any other equipment at the same time! The Geared variable speed
coupling is to be lifted only without oil in it!
32
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 4 Transport and Storage
2. Check anchor eyelets1 (4) for cracks, deformation and corrosion before using.
3. The Geared variable speed coupling is to be suspended from the indicated lifting
points (1, 2). When suspending, the lifting shackle (3) must be inserted into the
anchor eyelet (4). Hooking directly into the anchor eyelets is not permitted.
Transporting is only permitted in the indicated position, other suspension methods
are not permitted. Angle of inclination 45° ±2° and crane hook height H must be
observed (see Assembly Plan).
Illustration 4-3:
Lifting points
4 1 Lifting points
22 2 Stickers
1
11 3 Lifting shackle 4x
4 Lifting lugs 4x
1 33
1
Illustration 4-4:
Suspension sketch
Angle of inclination
Crane hook height H
(see Assembly Plan)
2
1 3
1
4. Unscrew the machine from the transport framework and pull the frame from under
the machine.
5. Set the Geared variable speed coupling down on the feet attached to the oil
reservoir.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
NOTE
The transport frame can later be used as an assembly block. Returning the
transport frame to Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG Crailsheim is only possible with
previous consultation.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
1. Anchor eyelets are to be checked by an expert at least once per year. Surfaces must undergo a
crack test every 3 years.
33
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 4 Transport and Storage
These specifications apply to the protection of internal and external surfaces (insofar
as the surfaces are not treated and/or corrosion-resistant or made of cast aluminum),
as well as the packing of the shipments.
Overview
Preservation
Transport, storage and Packaging No. External Internal with Internal without
storage duration test run test run
4. Extended protection (after Replace plastic film External Internal preservation No. 3
expiration of the initial protection) and reseal preservation No. 2
NOTE
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
If use of VCI preservation products for an order in ensured throughout the entire
packaging chain, corrosion protection based on this preservation method is
permissible if agreed upon. (Carefully flush the unit before filling in operation oil
as the VCI active ingredients may have a negative influence on the air release
property of oils).
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
1.Before installing the coupling or parts, clean sprayed surfaces with solvent (white spirits or petroleum).
34
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 4 Transport and Storage
• All surfaces of iron parts (including holes, cavities and internal surfaces of pipes) Internal
sprayed, immersed or flushed with solvent-free corrosion-inhibiting oil during preservation
assembly (with Shell Ensis Engine Oil 20 at the factory) based on installation No. 2
progress. All assemblies sprayed during assembly to the extent possible.
For alternatives to “Shell Ensis Engine Oil 20” see 3625-006237).
• Fill the interior of the coupling with dry air, relative humidity max. 10%.
• Means suitable for transport (e. g. transport frame, holder, support) Packaging No. 11
• Transport means provides protection from the weather.
• Means suitable for transport (e. g. transport frame, holder, support) Packaging No. 21
• Sharp edges and supporting surfaces covered with elastic materials.
• Sealed in PE film with low density (PE-LP 0,2 mm thick) according to DIN 55 530;
water vapor permeability WVPClimateB = 2 g/m2/24h or WVPClimateE = 0.4 g/m2/24h
according to DIN 53 122-22.
• Desiccant in acc. with DIN 55 473.
• Required desiccant units according to DIN 55 474 for permissible ultimate humidity
40%.
• Water-resistant carton or wooden crate.
• Inside of crate lid covered with closed ribbed PE sheets (Akylux). With PVC film
underneath at butt joints.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
• For checking the relative humidity, a humidity control window (90 mm) with mois-
ture indicator (30, 40, 50% RH) has to be integrated in the PE foil; a swiveling cover
has to be provided before the control window at the box.
• Identical to Packaging No. 2. Difference: sealed in aluminized plastic film accord- Packaging No. 3
ing to DIN 55 531instead of PE film.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
1. The unit is packaged in accordance with the latest version of the packaging guidelines issued by the German Association for
Wooden Packaging -Pallets - Export Packaging (HPE) e. V.
2. Tropical climate B: 38 °C, 90% RH; moderate climate E: 20 °C, 85% RH.
35
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 4 Transport and Storage
NOTE
Recommended
Supplier Designation grades
36
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 4 Transport and Storage
Special attention should be paid to the effectiveness of the preservation applied to Installed units or
these units, since it often subjected to additional hazards such as water, accumulation units ready for
of large amounts of dirt and physical damage. installation
This includes measures that provide supplemental internal protection when idle times Complete systems
of up to about 12 months are to be expected and when the original corrosion installed on a
prevention coating has been disturbed. foundation
Fill units with water-free working oil. The following can be performed at intervals of
1-2 months, depending on the state of installation:
NOTE
Before filling with the working fluids, contact the suppliers to confirm
compatibility with the internal corrosion preventative.
Appendix_A_ „Preservation method and instructions for storage after delivery 3625-
006714“
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
37
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
5 Configuration
The following safety information applies to the entire chapter. They must be observed
in addition to the various specific instructions.
Only a qualified electrician who is knowledgeable about rules that apply to electronic
equipment in the country of installation is allowed to perform work involving the
electrical equipment on the Geared variable speed coupling.
Use only cables with insulation that can withstand the ambient operating conditions!
A person could be severely injured while working on the machine when starting it up.
WARNING
Attach suitable protective covers that cannot be removed without the respective tool,
between the coupling and the shaft!
Only work on the machine when the system is shut down (no power)!
Operation is only permitted after visually ensuring that no persons are in the hazard
areas!
38
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Equipment damage
Creepage or stray electric currents can reach the Geared variable speed coupling via
CAUTION
the drive shaft, leading to spark erosion damage on bearing surfaces and the surfaces
of teeth on the drive gears in the pump insert.
Equipment damage
Dirt caused by construction, flying sparks, grinding dust and water can get into the
CAUTION
Geared variable speed coupling and cause the equipment to malfunction.
Cover the Geared variable speed coupling with a tarpaulin completely during
construction work at the installation site!
Use only appropriate sealants that are oil resistant up to 130 °C and do not contain
silicone. Failure to comply with the above will have an adverse effect on oil quality and
can cause damage to the geared variable-speed coupling.
Equipment damage
Improper installation can result in malfunctions and premature wear in the equipment.
CAUTION
Setup and initial commissioning should be performed by a Voith technician!
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
39
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
• Metric tools
• Torque wrench
• Sealing compound (must not contain silicone)
• Lifting appliances
• Device for mounting the coupling hubs
• Shims
• Adjusting screws on the foundation rails for horizontal alignment
• Adjusting screws for vertical alignment
• Alignment device
How to seal the keyway in the case of an oil-filled or grease-filled connecting coupling.
• Connecting coupling hub provided or still to be provided with a tapped hole above
the keyway.
• Mount the hub on the shaft.
• Fill the tapped hole 2/3 with the sealing compound1.
• Insert and tighten adjusting screw. Remove any sealing compound squeezed out
of the face side.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
1. LOCTITE 5910; When applying, please follow the instructions on the tube.
40
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
NOTE
Gear couplings or all-metal couplings with low radial restoring forces are
suitable. Connecting couplings with a flexible compensating element (flexible
element) are to be agreed upon only in individual cases.
If the connecting couplings are being supplied by Voith or have been provided by the Factory mounting
customer, the input- and output-side connecting coupling halves will have been
mounted at the factory:
• The end cover (2) and coupling hub (3) have been mounted on the shaft ends (1)
• The coupling sleeves are packaged separately.
Illustration 5-5:
2 Coupling hub on shaft
3
4
1 1 Shaft end
5 2 End cover
6 3 Coupling hub
mounting device
4 Plate
5 Bolt
6 Threaded spindle
NOTE
Check the connecting coupling for existence of the puller thread at the face end
and tapped hole above the keyway.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
41
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
1. Clean the shaft (1) and hub (3) from preservation agents using gasoline or Gear couplings
cellulose thinner (not petroleum) and degrease. with key
2. Check the bore, shaft, key and keyway for dimensional accuracy.
3. Remove the key from the shaft keyway and fit it into the hub keyway. Then fit the
key into the shaft keyway again. Check the height of the key: the back clearance
between the keyway and key must be 0.2 – 0.3 mm.
5. Slide the end cover (2) and O-rings over the shaft end.
7. Seal the keyway of the connecting coupling hub (Section 5.2.1 „How to seal the
keyway“).
8. Connecting couplings without an intermediate piece: slide the sleeve over the hub.
9. Connecting couplings with an intermediate piece: mount the sleeve only after
alignment.
1. Molykote D Paste; When applying, please follow the instructions on the tube/can.
Manufacturer Dow Corning Europe Rue General de Gaulle 62 B-1310 La Hulpe
42
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
After the Geared variable speed coupling has been installed, the bottom of the oil
reservoir with the connection for the oil drain line is, in most cases, not accessible.
Therefore, perform the following actions prior to positioning the Geared variable
speed coupling:
CAUTION
Environmental damage
1. Remove the blind flange from the oil drain line connection and collect any oil that Installing the oil
drains out. drain line with valve
2. Attach the valve to the oil drain line and install the complete line/valve assembly.
Close the valve.
43
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
NOTE
The calculation and construction for the foundation are not included in the
scope of delivery from Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG, therefore the customer or
a third-party is responsible for this. Cementing is also not the responsibility of
Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG.
Geared variable speed coupling set up with foundation rails on a concrete foundation. Anchoring methods
Illustration 5-6:
Concrete foundation
with anchoring methods
1 2 3
of 2 mm for putting shims beneath the Geared variable speed coupling and
foundation rails?
• Are the connecting coupling sleeves mounted or has a sufficient distance been
provided between the shafts for connecting couplings with an intermediate piece,
in order to mount the sleeve later?
• Can the oil lines be installed after positioning the Geared variable speed coupling?
• Is the driven machine fixed axially?
• Is the axial clearance of the driving machine within tolerances? Is the rotor of the
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
44
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Preparatory work:
Illustration 5-7:
2 Arrange the support
shims
1 Support shims
(by pairs)
2 Contact surfaces
(greased)
2. Mark the position of the support shims at the four corner points according to the
layout.
3. Set the support shims completely on the foundation and align them with one
another using a level. Measure the height of the support shims so that the Geared
variable speed coupling is positioned at least 1 mm under the 0 line (shaft
centerline).
Illustration 5-8:
Foundation rail
1 2 assembly
3
1 Housing base for the
6 Geared variable
2 speed coupling
4
7 3 Foundation bolt
Shim, 10mm thick
4 Foundation rail
5
5 Anchor bolt
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
6 Adjusting screw,
horizontal
7 Adjusting screw, ver-
tical
4. Screw the foundation rails (4) with the shims (3) onto the housing base of the
Geared variable speed coupling.
– The foundation rails are to be arranged so that the foundation bolts are
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
45
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
– Screw the adjusting screws (6) in to secure the foundation rails horizontally.
This will allow subsequent alignment of the Geared variable speed coupling on
the foundation rails.
5. Mount the anchor bolts (5) in the foundation rails so that two threads protrude past
the nut.
1. Set the Geared variable speed coupling down on the concrete foundation with the Setting down
aid of suitable lifting appliances. Every adjusting screw (7) must be positioned in
the center hole of the support shim. Maintain the specified axial clearance between
the connecting couplings in this case.
2. Use the adjusting screws to adjust the height of the Geared variable speed
coupling.
3. Align laterally by moving the Geared variable speed coupling on the support shims,
the surfaces of which have been greased.
The system components must be aligned with one another. Aligning to grout the
anchor bolts
Normal alignment sequence:
1. Align the Geared variable speed coupling with the driven machine
NOTE
All machines involved (driving machine, Geared variable speed coupling, driven
machine) should be set in position prior to performing the alignment.
1. Place the anchor bolts in the holes in the concrete foundation. Grouting of anchor
bolts
2. Fill in the holes or gaps in the concrete foundation with good, wet concrete mixture.
1 part cement
2 parts sand
NOTE
Vertically grouted anchor bolts do not impose any shearing forces on the
Geared variable speed coupling when tightening.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
46
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
At the very earliest, support measures can be started after three days. Foundation rail
supports
The rebasing for the foundation rails is to be done on both sides per anchor bolt.
Illustration 5-9:
Rebasing the foundation
rails
1 Compressed con-
3 crete
2 Base plate
2 3 Shim (Laminum)
4 Anchor bolt
1
Procedure 1:
1. Use a chisel to roughen the concrete foundation and clean with water.
1 part cement
2 parts sand
Do not make tamped concrete too wet.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
47
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Procedure 2:
1. Use a chisel to roughen the concrete foundation and clean with water.
2. Determine the space between the concrete foundation and the foundation rail.
3. Manufacture the base plate according to the spacing dimensions minus 1 cm.
5. Geared variable speed coupling, on the anchor bolts, are to be lifted approximately
5 cm.
8. Geared variable speed coupling is lowered onto the adjusting screws, which
compresses the tamped concrete. Excess will be pressed out to the side. Install
the nuts for the anchor bolts.
After a settling time of three days, the vertically adjusting screws are removed.
Any lateral deviations are corrected during final alignment using the adjusting bolts in Final alignment
the horizontal position.
If there are deviations in height, adjusting screws are threaded into the housing base
of the Geared variable speed coupling to vertically correct the radial offset.
Loosen the foundation bolts, and adjust the height by adjusting the shims between the
foundation rail and the housing base.
For measurements, see Section 5.6 „Machine alignment“.
Fasten the Geared variable speed coupling to Section 5.7 „Secure machine“ on the
foundation rails.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
48
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
After the final alignments have been made, the foundation rails must be cast in the Last concrete grout
concrete.
Illustration 5-10:
2 Concrete grout for the
foundation rails
3 1 Concrete grout
2 Geared variable
1 speed coupling
3 Foundation rail
4 4 Concrete foundation
1. Frame the inside of the oil reservoir pit to the height of the foundation rail.
2. Grout in the foundation rails and the underlying space with a wet well-flowing
concrete mixture.
3. After the respective settling and hardening time, remove the framing and paint the
oil reservoir pit with an oil-resistant paint.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
49
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
The system components must be aligned with one another. All machines must be at
the standstill temperature. At operating temperature, the shafts must be optimally
aligned.
1. Align the Geared variable speed coupling with the driven machine
2. Align the driving machine with the Geared variable speed coupling
NOTE
When aligning the Geared variable speed coupling, dimensional changes arising from Shaft misalignment
the following must be taken into account:
When aligning the Geared variable speed coupling, dimensional changes arising from Shaft misalignment
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
50
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Illustration 5-11:
Radial and
I II axial displacement
av1 av2
I Input end
II Output end
Radial displacement
horizontally ah and
vertically av
Axial displacement
L
L1
L2
ah1
ah2
Axial displacement1
• input side (driving side) L 1 0.35 mm
• output side (driven side) L 2 0.35 mm
This means that the shafts connected by means of connecting couplings should not
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
be aligned at standstill, but rather must have a radial/angular/axial offset. This offset
compensates for the displacement arising at startup and during operation.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
51
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Illustration 5-12:
Angular displacement
ah bh and radial offset
1 Machine aligned
2 Machine still to be
aligned
1
2
Radial offset
horizontally ah and
av vertically av
bv
Angular misalign-
ment
horizontally bh and
vertically bv
A
Radius Rm
B
Rm
22
11 Rm
C
Illustration 5-13:
A Alignment using the
3 alignment device for
B connecting couplings
with an intermediate
piece
1 2
1 Machine aligned
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
2 Machine still to be
aligned
C
3 Alignment device
with dial gauges
52
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
1. Fabricate a solid alignment device out of flat stock, round bar stock and steel
profiles (3) and bolt to the shaft end of the machine to be aligned (2).
NOTE
The initial value or reading on the dial gauge can be 5.00 as assumed in the
following examples.
2. Insert the dial gauges so that they are free from play and secure them.
3. Check the radial runout of the already aligned machine (1): rotate the shaft (1) Radial runout check
by 360°.
6. Enter the dial indicator deflection in the coordinate system of the installation check
form.
Illustration 5-14:
B = 5.00 Example of radial
A = 5.00 C = 6.55 measurement A and
B = 5.00 C = 6.55 angular measurements
B and C in the vertical
plane
Evaluation:
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Radial measurement A:
Radial offset, vertical = 5-------------------------------
, 00 – 4, 66
- = 0, 17 mm
2
For the angular measurements: half of the difference between two angular
measurements is the amount of the angular misalignment.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
7. Correct the vertical radial offset and the vertical angular misalignment by means of
the adjusting bolts.
53
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
8. Place the alignment device (3) in the horizontal position (rotate 90° with respect to Precision alignment
the original position). in the horizontal
plane
9. Repeat the measurement.
Illustration 5-15:
Example of radial
B = 5.00 C = 5.00 measurement and
A = 5.28 A = 5.00
C = 4.55 B = 4.65 angular measurement in
the horizontal plane
Evaluation:
Radial measurement A:
Radial offset, horizontal = 5-------------------------------
, 28 – 5, 00
- = 0, 14 mm
2
10.Move the Geared variable speed coupling horizontally using the adjusting bolts
and in this way correct the horizontal radial offset and the horizontal angular
misalignment.
Prior to performing the precision alignment, it is advisable to first align the machines Rough alignment
roughly use a feeler gauge and straightedge.
Illustration 5-16:
1 Rough alignment of
connecting couplings
without an intermediate
piece
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
1 Straightedge
2 Feeler gauge
3 Coupling sleeve
4 Coupling hub
5 End cover
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
5 4 3 2
Following this, align the machine precisely using an alignment device with dial Precision alignment
gauges. in the vertical plane
Illustration 5-17:
Rough alignment of
connecting couplings
without an intermediate
piece
1
1 Alignment device
with dial gauges
2 Coupling hub
3 End cover
4 Coupling sleeve
2
3 5 Bolt
4 6 Spacer
3. Fabricate an alignment device out of flat bar stock (1) and attach it to the shafts.
NOTE
The initial value or reading on the dial indicator can be 5.00 as assumed in the
following examples!
4. Insert the dial indicators so that they are free from play and secure them.
5. Connect the sleeves of the connecting couplings (4) with each other using 2 bolts
(5) and 2 spacers (6) of about 20 mm.
6. Slide the flat steel between the two sleeves and rotate the two shafts by 180°.
55
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Illustration 5-18:
Securing to the
1 foundation
2
1 Housing base for the
Geared variable
speed coupling
3 2 Foundation bolts
2
3 Adjusting screws
4 Shims
4
1. Position shims (4) under the housing base of the Geared variable speed coupling
on all foundation bolts (2). Ensure that all shims support equally.
5. Record the final measurements in the coordinate system of the installation check
form.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
56
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
NOTE
If the heat exchanger is installed such that the pipes rise when viewed from the
Geared variable speed coupling, the oil cooler and piping will empty into the
Geared variable speed coupling when the system is shut down, causing the
Geared variable speed coupling to overfill and leak on startup. The temperature
will exceed the permissible value and the fusible plugs will melt.
If possible, install the heat exchanger below the level of the oil in the Geared
variable speed coupling! Take the necessary measures when installing it above
the oil level!
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
57
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Illustration 5-19:
Horizontal heat
H1 H2 H3 44 exchangers
44
1 Lube oil heat ex-
11 changer
2 Working oil heat ex-
22 changer
3 11 33 22
3 Vent line
4 Oil compensating
line
3
2
2
1
H1 H2 H3
Both heat exchangers below the Both heat exchangers at the same height Both heat exchangers at the same
Geared variable speed coupling and as the Geared variable speed coupling height as the Geared variable speed
positioned horizontally next to one and positioned horizontally next to one coupling and positioned above one
another1 another1 another 1
Piping and heat exchanger cannot Pipes and heat exchanger can drain.
drain.
Measures: run the oil supply and return lines to the heat exchanger siphon-like in an
Run the pipes to the heat exchanger upward direction and, at the highest point, connect an oil compensating line2
horizontally or descending, DN 8 (4). Run the lines below the oil level of the Geared variable speed coupling.
if possible. Favorable.
1. Working oil cooler shell vented three times, with collection line and return line to the Geared variable speed coupling housing.
(Section 5.8.5 „Installing the vent lines“)
2. Install an orifice plug with a 3 mm orifice opening in the oil compensating line.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
58
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Illustration 5-20:
V3 Vertical heat exchangers
3 44
V2
1 Lube oil heat ex-
11 2 changer
2 Working oil
heat exchanger
3 Vent line combined
with oil compensat-
ing line
V1 4 Vent valve
5 Check valve
5
11
11 22
2
V1 V2 V3/V4
Both heat exchangers below the Both heat exchangers below the Both heat exchangers at the same height as
Geared variable speed coupling Geared variable speed coupling and in the Geared variable speed coupling and in a
and in a vertical position against a vertical position1 vertical position
the wall1
Piping and heat exchanger cannot drain. Run the pipes to the heat Pipes and heat exchanger can drain.
exchanger horizontally or descending, if possible. Measures:
Favorable. • Run the lines below the oil level of the
Geared variable speed coupling.
59
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
NOTE
It is preferable to run the oil lines below the oil level in the Geared variable
speed coupling.
The oil lines should be as short as possible (< 8 m). In the case of longer lines that
run above the oil level in the Geared variable speed coupling, install a check valve in
the oil line from the Geared variable speed coupling to the heat exchanger and follow
the installation instructions for heat exchangers (Illustration 5-19 „Horizontal heat
exchangers“ on page 58 und Illustration 5-20 „Vertical heat exchangers“ on page 59).
Size the oil lines upstream and downstream of the heat exchanger to allow the lube oil
and working oil to flow at a velocity between 1.0 m/s and 4.0 m/s.
Maintain a constant oil line diameter over the entire length. In the case of larger
connections on the cooler, increase the line size directly at the cooler.
1. Remove the weld-neck flanges from the machine. Installing the oil
lines
2. Connect the Geared variable speed coupling to the heat exchanger as shown in
Illustration 5-19 „Horizontal heat exchangers“ on page 58 and Illustration 5-20
„Vertical heat exchangers“ on page 59. Ensure that the installed piping is free from
stress.
oil heat exchanger“ on page 61, item 3) of the heat exchanger to vent the shell.
– Attach a drain line with shutoff valve to the drain connection (Illustration 5-21
„Vent line for working oil heat exchanger“ on page 61, item 4) of the working oil
heat exchanger.
5. Install the external lube oil lines (e.g. for the driving machine, driven machine
and/or the connecting couplings.
6. Switch on the auxiliary lube oil pump. Pilot drill orifices at the lube oil outlets from Drilling of orifices
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
the Geared variable speed coupling to the driving machine and driven machine or for lube oil supplied
install already pilot drilled orifices. to external units
60
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
The lube oil flow rate and lube oil pressure for external units depend on the
diameter of these orifices and possibly on additional orifices upstream of bearing
locations on the driving and driven machines.
For diameters of orifice holes, please refer to Section 5.11 „Orifice holes for lube
oil supply to external units“ in the appendix to this chapter.
For required lube oil flow rates, please refer to Section 1.2 „Operating data“.
It is necessary to vent the working oil heat exchanger continuously. Working oil heat
exchanger vent line
(H1, H2, H3, V3)
Tube bundle - heat exchanger
Illustration 5-21:
Vent line for working oil
11
heat exchanger
5
22
1 Collection line
3
3 2 Screw-in orifice
3 Vent connection
4 Drain connection
= = 5 Coupling housing
Install the vent line as shown in Illustration 5-21 „Vent line for working oil heat
exchanger“ on page 61 :
1. Insert three screw-in orifices (2) at the three vent connections (3) in the oil cooler
shell.
3. Run the collection line to the Geared variable speed coupling (5) (see installation
diagram for tie-in point).
When installing the heat exchanger above the oil level in the Geared variable speed Oil compensating
coupling, the oil compensating line (H2, H3, V4) or the vent line (V3) between the two line DN 8 (H2, H3,
siphon-like line segments prevents the heat exchangers from draining when the V4), vent line (V3)
equipment is at a standstill.
Attach oil compensating line and vent line as shown in Illustration 5-19 „Horizontal heat
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
exchangers“ on page 58 and Illustration 5-20 „Vertical heat exchangers“ on page 59.
61
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
NOTE
Before preparing this or another pickle, be sure to read and understand the
specifications, safety information (data sheets) and application information.
WARNING
Oil lines assembled and welded on site must be disassembled and pickled in an Pickling oil lines
immersion bath to ensure that they are free from scale and rust. Only then can they made of steel
be reassembled and flushed. (neither rust-proof
nor acid-proof)
1. Unscrew the oil lines.
4. To remove dirt, light oil films, graphite or carbon deposits: add pickling degreaser2
to the pickle.
7. Remove the parts from the pickle. After pickling, they should be bright and free
from scale and rust.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
62
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Pickling period
8. Allow the parts to dry protected from dripping water (24–48 hours at 20 °C). Do not
wash off! If the drying time cannot be observed, rinse again with clean water.
9. Spray parts internally with the working oil and externally with paint.
Oil lines assembled and welded on site must be disassembled and pickled in an Pickling of oil lines
immersion bath to ensure that they are free from scale, temper colors and rust. made of rust-proof
Only then can they be reassembled and flushed. and acid-proof steel
(stainless steel)
NOTE
Before preparing this or another pickle, be sure to read and understand the
specifications, safety information (data sheets) and application information.
5. Remove the parts from the pickle. After pickling, they should be bright and free
from scale and rust.
Pickling procedure for materials with the materials nos.1.4541, 1.4550, 1.4571
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
1. Recommendation: product DERUSTIT 1622, manufacturer Deutsche Derustit GmbH • Emil von
Behringstrasse 4 • Dietzenbach/Germany • or equivalent degreaser.
2. Recommendation: product DERUSTIT pickle 1234, manufacturer Deutsche Derustit GmbH • Emil
von Behringstrasse 4 • Dietzenbach/Germany • or equivalent pickle.
63
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
1 to 4 weeks 40 to 60 min.
Pickling procedure for materials with the material nos. 1.4301, 1.4306, 1.4401
1 to 4 weeks 20 to 30 min.
CAUTION
Environmental damage
6. Flush the part with water1, making sure to comply with protection regulations.
9. Let the parts dry in clean rooms. Allow parts with cavities to dry in pure nitrogen.
10.Spray parts internally with the working oil and externally with paint.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
64
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
WARNING
Risk of injury
WARNING
Risk of injury
CAUTION
3. Check motors for their direction of rotation, current draw and protection by fuses.
Terminal diagram for wiring in the junction box.
Section 14 „Attaching Parts“ of these Operating Instructions for detailed
information on the instruments installed.
65
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
• Guarding to prevent accidental contact with rotating and hot components Types of guarding
(connecting couplings, oil lines) and other recognizable source of danger and protection
• Protection from noise
• Protection from the weather in the event of outdoor installation (roof or enclosure)
WARNING
Risk of injury
CAUTION
Burn hazard
Attach guarding to prevent contact with rotating and hot components and other
recognizable sources of danger in compliance with the safety regulations of the
operator and/or the country where the equipment is being installed.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
66
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Attach sound-absorbing covers in such a way as to not impede continued Unimpeded work
performance of the following activities1.
CAUTION
Explosion hazard
WARNING
Poisoning hazard
67
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
• Avoid exposing instruments, control units, electrical insulation and equipment Heat dissipation and
to excessive operating temperatures. ventilation
• Provide separate ventilation for electric motors. The cooling air for an air-cooled
electric motor can be used for ventilation, if necessary (consider the characteristic
curve of the cooling fan and the required motor cooling).
• Regulate the air flow in the cover to ensure heat dissipation (determine the flow
rate for a cooling air temperature increase of 10 °C).
• Route the vented air from the gearbox housing and coverings (closed connecting
coupling covers) through the sound-absorbing covers via ducts.
• Provide openings and seals for shaft passages, windows for viewing of
instruments, pipe and cable entry points and vents.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
68
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 5 Configuration
Curve from
equation:
69
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 6 Commissioning
6 Commissioning
The following safety information applies to the entire chapter. They must be observed
in addition to the various specific instructions.
Attach suitable guarding over the connecting couplings that can only be removed by
using tools!
Oil can escape from leaking connections or seals, create a slipping hazard and cause
WARNING
injury as well as damage to the environment.
Escaping operating fluids could cause burns or injuries as well as damage to the
CAUTION
environment.
Wear personal protective equipment, in particular, safety goggles when filling oil,
when checking for leaks and when changing filters!
Follow the procedures specified on the material safety data sheet for the particular
operating fluid!
Equipment damage
The Geared variable speed coupling is delivered without any oil in it. Operation
CAUTION
without oil will damage the equipment within a few seconds.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Prior to startup, fill the Geared variable speed coupling with the working oil!
Note
Before starting the driving machine, check all attaching parts (instruments, actuator,
motor etc.) for:
NOTE
Proper connection of the supply voltage, transmittal/processing of control and
monitoring signals.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
70
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 6 Commissioning
For Voith's list of recommended oils, see Section 6.7 „Operating fluids“. The oil grades Criteria for suitable
contained in this list have been selected on the basis of the following criteria: working oil
NOTE
If using an oil grade that does not appear in the recommended oil list:
- Check compatibility with Voith's corrosion-preventing oil (Shell Ensis Engine Oil 20).
- Check the suitability of the oil on the basis of the criteria listed in Section 6.7
„Operating fluids“.
- Clean the inside of the Geared variable speed coupling.
For the required amount of oil, see Section 1.2 „Operating data“ and the instructions
regarding the oil cooler in Chapter 14 „Attaching Parts“ of this documentation.
NOTE
Fill the working oil as soon the piping for the system has been completed.
1. Add oil at the flanged connection identified as "Oil filling" on the coupling's housing Filling oil
(see location of the item in the assembly plan).
midway between the min. and max. marks on the oil level indicator.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
71
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 6 Commissioning
The newly installed oil lines must be flushed for several days prior to the actual
commissioning (corrosion protection and filtering of the oil).
1. Check the oil level (should be midway between the oil level in operation and max. To be checked prior
marks on the level indicator). to flushing
2. Check and add lubricant for attached parts such as actuator and connection
couplings, as necessary.
5. Start the electrically operated auxiliary lube oil pump (lock out the driving machine Start the flushing
in case it would otherwise start automatically). operation
The lube oil circuit fills. The working oil circuit, the working oil cooler and the oil
lines in the system are filled by an interconnecting line with orifice between the
lube oil circuit and the working oil circuit.
8. Check the lube oil flow rate for external equipment and, if necessary, correct by Additional items to
changing the size of the opening in the orifice plugs (Section „Drilling of orifices for be checked during
lube oil supplied to external units“ on page 60). the flushing
operation
9. Check the amount of oil injected into the connecting coupling when working with
injection lubrication (manufacturer's specification) and, if necessary, correct by
installing orifice plugs.
10.Check and fill the oil (should be midway between the oil level in operation and max.
marks on the level indicator) if necessary.
11.Check the lubricating oil pressure and adjust on the pressure limiting valve for
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
lubricating oil if necessary (Section 6.5 „Set the lubricating oil pressure“).
12.Check the operating points of the pressure measuring devices and, if necessary,
correct.
13.Flush the oil lines until the duplex oil filter remains clean (one to several days). Ending the flushing
operation
14.Switch off the auxiliary lube oil pump.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
72
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 6 Commissioning
1. Check the alignment of the coupling and correct as necessary. Items to be checked
1. Check attachment to the foundation. and adjusted prior
to the trial run
2. Loosen connecting couplings and check the direction of rotation of the drive motor
with the Geared variable speed coupling uncoupled.
3. Check and add lubricant for attached parts such as actuator and connection
couplings, as necessary.
5. Check that manufacturer specifications are met when adjusting the supply of
lubricating oil to external equipment.
6. Check the oil level (should be midway between the oil level in operation and max.
marks on the level indicator).
7. Check for proper connection of the supply voltage to the electrical system as well
as transmittal/processing of signals.
8. When using water/oil coolers, open the valves on the water side, vent the water
side of the oil cooler and check the flow rate.
9. Upon delivery, review the operational data and the operating instructions for the oil
cooler in Chapter 14 „Attaching Parts“ of this instruction manual.
10.Check the setting of the actuator over the angular adjustment range on the scoop
tube positioning device. Both end positions must be restricted mechanically
(positive stops) on the actuator.
– At 100 % scoop tube position, check the max. actuation and feedback signal on
the actuator and correct if necessary.
– The min. actuation or feedback signal corresponds with a scoop tube position
of 0 % after going through the angular adjustment range.
73
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 6 Commissioning
6. Slowly increase the speed of the driven machine. Increase the speed
slowly
7. Monitor and log temperatures and pressure until they stabilize.
8. Check the functionality of the temperature controller (if installed) on the lubricating
oil cooler (see the operating instructions for the heat exchanger in Chapter 14
„Attaching Parts“ of this Instruction Manual).
9. If the hubs for the connecting couplings have not been provided and balancing of
the complete arrangement was performed without original hubs: rebalance the
input and output shafts if the equipment does not operate perfectly smoothly.
10.Perform vibration measurements on the coupling housing. Evaluate whether the
equipment is operating smoothly and log the scoop tube position, speed and
readying at measurements points. ( „Vibrations - housing“ on page 5)
11.If the working oil temperature is too high, correct the working oil flow rate
(Section 6.6 „Adjusting the working oil flow rate“).
If the characteristic of the system is to be optimized on the basis of the operating Operating over the
conditions: entire speed range
12.Operate the system over its entire speed range.
13.Adjust the working oil flow rate (Section 6.6 „Adjusting the working oil flow rate“).
16.Once the driving machine and the driven machine have come to a stop, switch off
the auxiliary lube oil pump.
17.Clean the duplex oil filter and fill with working oil as necessary After the trial run
(Section 8.4 „Cleaning the duplex oil filter“).
18.Check the oil level and correct (should be midway between the oil level in operation
and max. marks on the level indicator).
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
19.Check the fastening of the stops on the scoop tube positioning device. The stroke
must be limited on the positioning mechanism itself and not on the scoop tube
controller.
74
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 6 Commissioning
NOTE
Illustration 6-22:
Sequence valve
2 11 33
1 Sequence valve
2 Housing
44 3 Adjusting screw
4 Screw plug
WARNING
Burn hazard
3. Check the pressure increase at the pressure gauge and correct as necessary:
– Turning the adjusting screw clockwise:
Increasing the lubricating oil pressure
– Turning the adjusting screw counterclockwise:
Reducing the lubricating oil pressure
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
75
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 6 Commissioning
WARNING
Risk of injury
CAUTION
Equipment damage
The orifice in the working oil circuit is used to feed the coupling with the amount of Oil circulation
working oil necessary to compensate for power losses. The oil flow rate is set at the control
factory to the value obtained from the power loss calculations.
If oil temperatures that are too high or too low during certain points of operation, the
working oil pressure and the orifice diameter are to be changed in the working oil
circuit.
If the oil temperature is high or low throughout the entire speed and scoop tube High or low oil
adjustment range, the oil flow can be adjusted, i.e. increased or reduced. temperature over
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
The maximum oil flow is required at a scoop tube position between 40 % and 50 %. the entire speed
range
NOTE
Changing the hole of the orifice is only to be done after discussing with VOITH-
Crailsheim.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
76
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 6 Commissioning
By adapting the working oil pressure and the hole dimension in the orifice, the
adjustment is made as follows:
– Raise or lower the working oil pressure by ±0.5 bar on the pressure limiting valve.
NOTE
Illustration 6-23:
11 Pressure relief valve
33 3 Adjusting screw
4 Screw plug
WARNING
Burn hazard
77
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 6 Commissioning
The following can be used, provided they satisfy the requirements: Grade selection by
operator and oil
• Hydraulic oils HLP 32 as specified in DIN 51524, Part 2
supplier
• Turbine oils as specified in DIN 51515, Part 1 and 2 with sufficient load-carry-
ing capacity (FZG) for gear lubrication
Do not mix different oil grades. Approval to use oil mixtures must be clarified
with the oil supplier.
78
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
7 Operation
The following safety information applies to the entire chapter. They must be observed
in addition to the various specific instructions.
A person could be severely injured while working on the machine when starting it up.
WARNING
Attach suitable protective covers that cannot be removed without the respective tool,
between the coupling and the shaft!
Only work on the machine when the system is shut down (no power)!
Operation is only permitted after visually ensuring that no persons are in the hazard
areas!
Attach suitable guarding over the connecting couplings that can only be removed by
using tools!
In the event of severe imbalance, a shaft could break as the result of vibrations and
WARNING
cause serious injury or damage to the equipment.
Leaking oil on or next to the machine could cause someone to slip or fall and be
WARNING
seriously injured.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Oil can escape from leaking connections or seals, create a slipping hazard and cause
WARNING
injury.
79
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
Fire hazard
In conjunction with high temperatures and oil, an electrical short circuit due to an
WARNING
abraded cable or water leaking into the junction box could trigger a fire and cause
personal injury or damage to the environment.
Fire hazard
Leaking (hot) oil or oil mist could trigger a fire and cause serious injury.
WARNING
Check for oil and leaks regularly!
Not observing the correct direction of rotation could damage the machine and
WARNING
severely injure persons.
The incorrect assembly of the machine or individual parts could damage the machine.
Allow only trained personnel to perform assembly, maintenance and service work!
Pressure shocks can cause vibration and pipe failure, and result in personal injury due
CAUTION
to leaking oil.
Ensure that the installation complies with the designated use of the equipment and
that the operating data and ambient conditions are taken into account!
Noise hazard
A sustained sound pressure level above 85 dBA could lead to loss of hearing.
CAUTION
Wear hearing protection!
Environmental pollution
80
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
CAUTION
Equipment damage
1. Perform the same checks as before starting the trial run Checks prior to
(Section „Items to be checked and adjusted prior to the trial run“ on page 73). start-up
The Geared variable speed coupling can, in principle, be started up with the scoop
tube in any position. However, starting up with the scoop tube in the 0 % position
is preferred, since the driving machine can come up to speed with practically no
load.
Start-up
Aux. lube oil pump switches ON The coupling and driven machine are at
standstill.
Bearings are being lubricated
With lubricating oil pressure Switch the driving machine ON Driving machine starts up.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
3 minutes after starting the drive Switch the aux. oil lube pump OFF Coupling and driven machine are
machine and at a lubricating oil operating.
pressure of „> 2.2 bar“
Place the scoop tube in the n % position. Driven machine is operating at the
desired speed.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
81
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
Shutdown
Operating conditions Action Result
Automatically at drive machine OFF Aux. lube oil pump switches ON Bearings continue to be lubricated.
or at lubricating oil pressure
„< 1.5 bar“.
After the equipment comes to a stop Switch the aux. oil lube pump OFF Bearings are no longer lubricated.
(standstill)
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
82
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
• Temperatures
• Lube oil pressure
• Differential pressure (duplex oil filter)
• Oil level
NOTE
Temperatures
Oil reservoir
Temperature of oil in the reservoir Operating range1 „> 45 < 65 °C“
Alarm at1 „65 °C“
Shutdown at1 „70 °C“
Bearings
Bearing temperatures Operating range „< 90 °C“
Alarm at „90 °C“
Shutdown at „95 °C“
Set the trigger point for the message "Bearing temperature too high" to about 15 °C
above the temperature of the warmest bearing or to „90 °C“.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
83
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
Working oil
Working oil temperature Operating range „> 60 < 110 °C“
upstream of the working oil cooler Alarm at1 „110 °C“
Shutdown at „130 °C“
1. Temperatures above 110 °C do not occur during normal operation, but only when flushing or
performing a similar activity.
2. Signal, only with appropriate instrumentation
Lube oil
Lube oil temperature Operating range „> 45 < 65 °C“
upstream of the lubricating oil cooler Alarm at1 „65 °C“
Shutdown at1 „70 °C“
The fusible plugs melt when the working oil temperature in the scoop chamber Fusible plugs
reaches 160 °C1, thus preventing overheating of the coupling.
1. if the necessary oil temperature acts on the solder in the fusible plug together with a suitable oil
pressure.
84
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
Pressures
Working
Main pump oil pressure „3.5 to 5.5 bar“ oil/lubricating oil
Pressure gauge (Assembly plan)
Working oil pressure before the working oil orifice1 „1.5 to 2.2 bar“
Test connection II/M2 (Assembly plan)
Working oil pressure after the working oil orifice „0.2 to 0.5 bar“
Test connection III/M3 (Assembly plan)
The working oil pressure before the "Working oil" orifice is maintained within the
operating range by the pressure relief valve.
Lubricating oil pressure: see Section 6.5 „Set the lubricating oil pressure“
Oil level
When the coolers and tubing are full, the oil level should be midway between the oil
level in operation and the max. mark of the oil level indicator.
The actuator adjusts the scoop tube between position 0 % and 100 %. The scoop
tube position determines the speed of the driven machine.
The actuator is positioned by a control signal „4 - 20 mA“ from the master controller.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
85
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
Pressure differential across duplex oil filter Switch and clean „> 0.6 bar“
filter at
The duplex oil filter cleans the lubricating oil. It has two filtering jugs, through only one
of which oil flows during operation. The filter is equipped with a differential pressure
switch that triggers an alarm when the pressure differential across the filter becomes
too large. If an alarm occurs, the filter housing no longer allows sufficient oil through
during operation and must be cleaned (Section 8.4 „Cleaning the duplex oil filter“).
Before the duplex oil filter is switched to the second filter, it must be flooded. Flooding the clean
filtering jug
NOTE
If the clean filter housing is not flooded, the lube oil pressure drops too
drastically upon switching the double filter and the system is shut down by the
monitoring instruments.
Illustration 7-24:
Duplex oil filter
6
5
4 4
1 Contaminated filter
housing
3 2 Clean filter housing
1 1 3 Vent filter
4 Vent line
5 Flood spindle
6 Change-over lever
1. Remove the plug. Place a container under the vent line (4). Slightly open the vent
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
valve (3).
2. Raise the flood spindle (5) and flood the clean filter housing (2) until the oil
escapes the vent line (4).
86
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
4. Using the change-over lever, slowly switch the filter to the clean filtering jug. Changing over the
filter
Illustration 7-25:
Changing over the
33 3
3 double oil filter
3 33
1 Filtering jug in use
11 2 11 1 2 11 2 Filter jug to be
cleaned
3 Flow indication
The term "tailspin" describes the slow rotation of the coupling caused by the driven Tailspin
machine after the system has been shut down, e.g. by a fan drive.
• Switch on the auxiliary lube oil pump to ensure that the bearings are lubricated.
If the working machine can run backwards, a rotational direction monitor must be Rotation of the
used. If this rotational direction monitor indicates running backwards: secondary shaft in
the opposite
• Switch on the auxiliary lube oil pump without delay.
direction
• Set the scoop tube to the 100 % position.
• Close the shutoff valve on the driven machine.
• Limit rotation in the opposite direction to max. 1–3 minutes.
• Before starting again, check the bearings and fusible plugs.
NOTE
If stopped by switching off or reverse running and before starting the Geared
variable speed coupling:
87
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
NOTE
The value of the information obtained from an analysis of the working oil
depends on correct and careful sampling. An oil sample is preferably taken from
a region with good flow of oil either during operation or immediately after a
system shutdown.
In the case of the Geared variable speed coupling, the oil sample should be taken
from the lube oil circuit. A reliable oil sample can be drawn from the filtering jug
currently in operation.
CAUTION
Burn hazard
The filter housing, oil lines and working oil can be hot.
In an extreme case, up to 60 °C for this section of the
lube oil circuit.
WARNING
Risk of injury
Hot, pressurized oil in the duplex oil filter and vent line
can cause serious injury.
88
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
1. Identify the active filtering jug. The selector handle indicates which filter housing is Taking the oil
being used (Illustration 7-25 „Changing over the double oil filter“ on page 87). sample
NOTE
Perform the remaining operations only on the filtering jug currently in use.
The oil sample is only to be taken from the clean oil side (filter cover).
NOTE
If the vent valve is opened too far, a pressure drop could result, causing the
monitoring instruments to shut down the system.
3. Place the collection container for the initial amount beneath the valve and open the
vent valve slightly.
4. After drawing off some initial oil, fill the oil sample container with working oil.
6. Perform working oil analysis (Section 8.6 „Test criteria and notes for evaluating
working oils“).
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
89
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
• Switch on the auxiliary lube oil pump for at least five minutes daily.
• Protect the Geared variable speed coupling against ingress of water and moisture.
Apply corrosion inhibitor to bare metal parts.
• Start up the Geared variable speed coupling briefly every 1–2 months. Do not
allow to operate until warm (risk of condensation forming).
The internal surfaces of the equipment receive a light film of oil and are thus protected
against corrosion.
Appendix_A_ „Preservation method and instructions for storage after delivery 3625-
006714“
Oil cooler standstill times: see instruction manual for the oil cooler in Chapter 14
„Attaching Parts“ of this instruction manual.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
90
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 7 Operation
WARNING
Risk of injury
CAUTION
Environmental damage
Prior to disassembly for salvage purposes or scrapping, completely remove any oil or
other substances that pose a danger to water.
The Geared variable speed coupling is made of steel, lightweight alloys and various
plastics. These materials can be salvaged and recycled.
Send problem materials that can no longer be used to an authorized disposal facility.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
91
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
8 Maintenance
The following safety information applies to the entire chapter. They must be observed
in addition to the various specific instructions.
Without the connecting coupling attached and the protective cover, the key or bolts for
WARNING
the connecting coupling could slip out and injure someone.
Allow only trained personnel to perform assembly, maintenance and service work!
The variable-speed coupling must be started up only after the connecting coupling is
attached (as a minimum) or the complete connecting coupling and protective guarding
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
A system that has not been shut down completely and secured could restart and
WARNING
injure anyone working on the equipment.
Only work on the machine when the system is shut down (no power)!
A person could be severely injured while working on the machine when starting it up.
WARNING
Attach suitable protective covers that cannot be removed without the respective tool
between the coupling and the shaft!
Only work on the machine when the system is shut down (no power)!
Operation is only permitted after visually ensuring that no persons are in the hazard
areas!
Burn hazard
A person could burn themselves on the hot machine or on hot operational equipment.
WARNING
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
A person could be cut by sheet metal guarding that has not been deburred or by sharp
CAUTION
edges on an enclosure.
Allow only trained personnel to perform assembly, maintenance and service work!
Escaping operating fluids could cause burns or injuries as well as damage to the
CAUTION
environment.
92
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
Wear personal protective equipment, in particular, safety goggles when filling oil,
when checking for leaks and when changing filters!
Follow the procedures specified on the material safety data sheet for the particular
operating fluid!
Risk of injury
The wrong seals or improperly sealed metal surfaces, flanges, inadequately tightened
CAUTION
joints or incorrectly set pressure relief valves could allow oil to escape and cause
personal injury.
Allow only trained personnel to perform assembly, maintenance and service work!
Note
93
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
If the pressure differential across • Switch duplex oil filter and clean.
the duplex oil filter increases
If the speed of the driven machine • Check the air separation characteristics of the working oil.
fluctuates • Ensure that the working oil cooler is venting continuously.
If the oil level is high • Check the amount of water in the working oil1.
Every three months • Check vent filter for external soiling and clean as necessary.
• Inspect hose lines.
• Always check for smooth operation under the same operating conditions2, record
and compare the measurements.
• Inspect the working oil 1+3 for suitability
1. Section 8.6 „Test criteria and notes for evaluating working oils“
2. Specification of measurement points within the output speed range.
3. This maintenance interval can be extended, depending on experience with the equipment. This should not exceed 6 months.
If the oil quality is questionable • Determine and correct the causes. Separate or exchange the oil1.
(suitability for use)
The vibrations have increased • Check and correct alignment of the Geared variable speed coupling.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Between 50 and 500 hours of • Examine the gear teeth surfaces for signs of scuffing.
operation
After every 8,000 hours of Analyze the working oil for signs of aging; take any necessary measures1.
operation or at least annually Inspect and service the connecting couplings2.
Check and service the motor3 for the auxiliary lube oil pump.
Check and correct alignment of the Geared variable speed coupling. Check attachment
to the foundation.
Open the inspection hole cover on the housing cover and check the gears and coupling
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
from the outside. In particular, check the contact pattern on the tooth flanks and the
state of the fusible plugs (solder filling).
94
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
NOTE
Prior to restarting a Geared variable speed coupling that was shutdown for
some reason
- Check bearings for signs of overheating
- Inspect the fusible plugs
- Switch on the auxiliary lube oil pump and check the oil pressure
95
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
Duplex oil filter Section 7.3.3 „Changing over the duplex oil filter“ and Section 8.4 „Cleaning
the duplex oil filter“
Actuator Operating instructions for the actuator in Chapter 14 „Attaching Parts“ of this
instruction manual
96
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
• Cleaning container with clean mineral spirits or diesel oil (approx. 5 l) Accessories
• Container for collecting drained oil (approx. 10 l)
• Angled fine brush (Do not use a heavy brush!)
• Compressed air
• Roll of corrugated cardboard or newspaper
CAUTION
Environmental damage.
Illustration 8-26:
Duplex oil filter
3 1 Change-over lever
1
2 Vent valve
4
3 Oil drain valve
2 2
4 Plug
3. First open the oil drain valve (3) and then the vent valve (2) on the dirty filter
housing and collect the draining oil in a suitable container.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
NOTE
97
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
Illustration 8-27:
Filter housing with filter
66 element
7
55 5 Compression spring
6 Filter cover
7 Filter element
8
8 Filter housing
9 Magnetic bolt
5. Clean the contaminated inside of the filter element (7) with mineral spirits or diesel Cleaning the filter
oil; wash out the inside of the filter element from top to bottom using the fine brush. element
Do not immerse the filter element in the cleaning fluid.
6. Insert the roll of paper into the filter element. Blow out the entire surface of the filter
element from the outside with compressed air. Remove the dirty roll of paper.
9. If particles from the seals or gaskets are observed in the filter element, immerse
the insert briefly (max. 15 min.) in Trichloroethylene or a substitute and wash off.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
12.Insert the filter element (7) into the filter housing (8). Make sure to watch that the Reinstalling the
O-rings are installed correctly while doing this. filter element
13.Insert the compression spring (5) and install the filter cover (6). Close the oil drain
valve and the vent valve. Screw in the plugs.
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
14.Fill the filter housing with oil (Section „Flooding the clean filtering jug“ on page 86).
98
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
• Storage duration: Max. four years from the time of manufacture Storage
• Environmental conditions: Dry rooms without direct sunlight
• Utilization duration: Max. six years, depending on use and environmental Utilization
influences
NOTE
• Outer layer damage to the woven inlay (worn areas, cuts or cracks) Inspection criteria
• Brittle outer layer (cracks)
• Deformed when under pressure or not (layers separated, bubbles)
• Leaks
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
99
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
The suitability of working oils for continued use should be checked and evaluated at General
regular intervals.
The value of the information obtained from an analysis of the working oil depends on
correct and careful sampling Section 7.5 „Taking a sample of the working oil“.
NOTE
This list contains aspects to be considered and rough limits for evaluating the
suitability of working oils for continued use.
The decision regarding the suitability of the working oil for continued use
remains the right of the manufacturer and oil supplier.
The following can only be considered recommendations, since they depend on the
operating conditions, formulation and type of working oil.
• Increase in NZ(s) versus that of fresh oil (new working oil) Neutralization
number NZ(s)
– Turbine oil -TD-0.5 -1 mg KOH/g
(DIN 51558)
– Hydraulic oil -HLP-1 - 1.5 mg KOH/g
– Lube oil -CLP-1.5 - 2 mg KOH/g
(DIN 51582)
No oil change is necessary, if the water content is eliminated by means of
– Centrifuging
– Filtering through a coalescence separator
– Vacuum treatment
– Settling (allowing to rest for 1-2 days) and then draining or pumping off1
– Heating
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
1. In the case of synthetic oils with a density >1.0, condensation, for instance, floats on top.
100
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
• Occurrence of pressure and speed fluctuations, if too low an oil level is to be Air separation
excluded and the LAV value > 5 minutes (0.2 % at 50 °C). characteristics LVA
(DIN 51381)
• Reduction in FZG load level, if it drops more than one level. Damaging force
(remaining additive content of EP components < 30 %) level in FZG test
A/8,3/90
(DIN 51354)
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
101
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 8 Maintenance
Illustration 8-28:
b a Location of the fusible
plug
11 2
2
33
1 Primary wheel
2 Shell
3 Fusible plug
2. Rotate the input shaft until the fusible plugs (or the holes for the fusible plugs)
in the shell are visible.
3. Check the solder filling in the plugs; install new plugs, if necessary.
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
102
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 9 Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Start-up
Driven machine does • Scoop tube set at 0 % • Take the following actions:
not start up after the – Move scoop tube towards 100 %
driving machine has – Check the actuator power supply
attained its rated – Check the positioning signal
speed – Troubleshooting (Actuator operating
instructions)
• Working oil pump does not deliver oil • Take the following actions:
– Oil temperature in the oil reservoir – Warm oil to > +5 °C, possibly by running the
< +5 °C or oil viscosity pump. Close the cooling water supply on the
> 250 mm2/s lube oil cooler
– Oil level too low – Check the oil leve3l and fill to a value between
the oil level during operation and the Max.
mark. Check the fusible plugs.
– Foaming oil (oil temp. too low; – Check to oil for contaminants. Centrifuge or
water in the oil; poor air separation separate the oil Change oil, if necessary
characteristics; wrong oil grade)
– Check the work oil pump pressure at pressure
– Working oil pump pressure test ports
< 1.0 bar
– Working oil delivery rate too low – Increase working oil flow
• Startup torque too high (high motor • Check that driven machine turns freely. Check
inrush current), driven machine fusible plugs
blocked (see working oil temperature)
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
103
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 9 Troubleshooting
Automat. control: • Master controller overshoot • Dampen controller (Section "Manual control")
• Output speed • Adjustment speed of actuator too high • Compare the adjustment speed with the design
fluctuates data; Discuss with Voith Crailsheim
• The actuator and
scoop tube move • Play between the actuator and the • Replace the connection between the actuator and
occasionally (see control lever the control lever
deviation indicator)
• Play between the control block and the • Replace the scoop tube positioning mechanism
scoop tube
Manual control: • Foaming oil (oil temperature in • Warm oil in the reservoir to > 40 °C. To do so,
reservoir < 40 °C, resulting in poor air lower the cooling water flow rate by partially
• Output speed separation characteristics) closing the cooling water inlet valve on the lube oil
fluctuates cooler.
• Actuator and scoop
tube at a standstill • Working oil pump pressure fluctuates • Take the following actions:
(see deviation – Oil temperature in the oil reservoir – Warm oil in the reservoir to > 40 °C. To do so,
indicator) < 40 °C, resulting in poor air lower the cooling water flow rate by partially
separation characteristics closing the cooling water inlet valve on the
lube oil cooler
– Oil level too low – Check the oil leve3l and fill to a value between
the oil level during operation and the Max.
mark. Check the fusible plugs.
– Foaming oil (oil temp. too low; – Check the oil for impurities. Centrifuge or
water in the oil; poor air separation separate the oil Change oil, if necessary
characteristics; wrong oil grade)
– Working oil pump pressure – Check the work oil pump pressure at pressure
< 1.5 bar test ports
– Working oil delivery rate too low – Increase working oil flow
• Air trapped in working oil cooler • Check that cooler is vented completely (the
escaping periodically into coupling working oil cooler must be vented at three
locations on the shell)
• Pressure or flow rate variations in the • Check the feed water supply system
water supply system (in the case of a
pump-operated supply)
Output speed cannot • Fault on the actuator or in the control • Check the actuator and the control circuit
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
• Fault in the scoop tube adjustment • Check the scoop tube control and the ease of
device movement of the scoop tube mechanism
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
104
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 9 Troubleshooting
Max. output speed not • Scoop tube not at 100 % • Check the position of the scoop tube; shift the
attained stops on the actuator if necessary
• Fusible plugs have melted • Determine and correct cause. Install new fusible
plugs.
• Power consumption of the working oil • Check the motor rating with the project design
pump too high data. Check that driven machine turns freely.
• Working oil flow rate too low • Readjust the working oil flow rate
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
105
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 9 Troubleshooting
9.3 Pressures
Lube oil pressure too • Motor for auxiliary lube oil pump • Check line connections
low to enable startup connected incorrectly
• Pressure relief valve set too low • Correct the pressure relief valve setting
• Lube oil filter clogged • Switch lube oil filters and clean filter housing.
Check pressure differential monitoring.
Pressure differential • Lube oil filter clogged • Switch lube oil filters and clean filter housing.
across duplex filter too
high
Lube oil pressure too • Lube oil filter clogged • Switch lube oil filters and clean filter housing.
low during normal
operation • Pressure relief valve jammed or set • Check the pressure relief valve; reset lubricating
incorrectly oil pressure if necessary.
• Check valve in auxiliary lube oil pump • Check the check valve
circuit jammed (motor for auxiliary lube
oil pump rotating in the wrong
direction)
Working oil pump • Oil temperature in reservoir < 40 °C, • Warm oil in the reservoir to > 40 °C. To do so,
pressure too low resulting in poor air separation lower the cooling water flow rate by partially
characteristics closing the cooling water inlet valve on the lube oil
cooler
• Oil level too low • Check the oil leve3l and fill to a value between the
oil level during operation and the Max. mark.
Check fusible plugs.
• Foaming oil (oil temp. too low; water in • Check to oil for contaminants. Centrifuge or
the oil; poor air separation separate the oil Change oil, if necessary
characteristics; wrong oil grade)
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
106
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 9 Troubleshooting
9.4 Temperatures
Lube oil temperature • Fusible plugs have melted • Determine and correct cause. Install new fusible
upstream of lube oil plugs.
cooler too high
• Lube oil pressure too low • Check the lube oil system
• Switch lube oil filters and clean filter housing.
Check pressure differential monitoring.
• Check the oil level.
• Check the pressure relief valve.
• Increase the lube oil pressure.
Working oil • Startup torque too high (high motor • Check that driven machine turns freely. Check
temperature rises to inrush current), driven machine fusible plugs
above 110 °C blocked (see working oil temperature)
upstream of the
working oil cooler • Working oil pump does not deliver oil • Take the following actions:
during startup – Oil temperature in the oil reservoir – Warm oil in the reservoir to > 40 °C. To do so,
< 40 °C, resulting in poor air lower the cooling water flow rate by partially
separation characteristics closing the cooling water inlet valve on the
lube oil cooler
– Oil level too low – Check the oil level and fill to a value between
the oil level during operation and the Max.
mark. Check the fusible plugs.
– Foaming oil (oil temp. too low; – Check the oil for impurities. Centrifuge or
water in the oil; poor air separation separate the oil Change oil, if necessary
characteristics; wrong oil grade)
– Working oil pump pressure – Check the working oil pump pressure at
< 1.5 bar pressure test connections
– Working oil delivery rate too low – Increase working oil flow rate
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
– Oil system not filled prior to startup – Fill the oil system with the aid of the auxiliary
lube oil pump. Check the piping system
(correct pipe routing, no draining into the oil
reservoir) Check the fusible plugs
107
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 9 Troubleshooting
Working oil • Working oil pump does not deliver oil • Take the following actions:
temperature rises to – Oil temperature in the oil reservoir – Warm oil in the reservoir to > 40 °C. To do so,
above 110 °C < 40 °C, resulting in poor air lower the cooling water flow rate by partially
upstream of the separation characteristics closing the cooling water inlet valve on the
working oil cooler lube oil cooler
during operation
– Oil level too low – Check the oil level and fill to a value between
the oil level during operation and the max.
mark. Check the fusible plugs.
– Foaming oil (oil temp. too low; – Check the oil for impurities. Centrifuge or
water in the oil; poor air separation separate the oil Change oil, if necessary
characteristics; wrong oil grade)
– Working oil pump pressure – Check the working oil pump pressure at
< 1.5 bar pressure test connections
– Working oil delivery rate too low – Increase working oil flow rate
• Fusible plugs have melted • Determine and correct cause. Install new fusible
plugs.
• Operating outside the performance • Comply with design data, especially the pump
characteristics specified for the project characteristic curve
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
108
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 9 Troubleshooting
• Poor support between equipment and • Check the alignment and support;
foundation (foundation rails); uneven correct, if necessary
support; equipment cocked
109
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 9 Troubleshooting
Working oil cooler: Operating instructions for oil cooler in Chapter 14 „Attaching Parts“ of this
instruction manual
Bleeding the working oil cooler Section 5.8.2 „Horizontal heat exchangers“
Section 5.8.5 „Installing the vent lines“
Working oil flow rate Section 6.6 „Adjusting the working oil flow rate“
Orifice plugs for lubrication of Section „Drilling of orifices for lube oil supplied to external units“ on page 60
external equipment
Auxiliary lube oil pump motor Operating instructions for the auxiliary lube oil pump motor in
Chapter 14 „Attaching Parts“ of this instruction manual
Bearings
Oil Section 8.6 „Test criteria and notes for evaluating working oils“
Lube oil pressure Section 6.5 „Set the lubricating oil pressure“
Lube oil filter Section 8.4 „Cleaning the duplex oil filter“
Lube oil cooler Operating instructions for oil cooler in Chapter 14 „Attaching Parts“ of this
instruction manual
Actuator Operating instructions for the actuator in Chapter 14 „Attaching Parts“ of this
instruction manual
Connecting couplings Operating instructions for the connecting couplings in Chapter 14 „Attaching
Parts“ of this instruction manual
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
110
10 Introduction to General
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Overhaul
NOTE
The following safety information applies to the entire chapter. They must be observed
in addition to the various specific instructions.
During maintenance and assembly work, especially when turning shafts manually,
WARNING
during assembly work and when positioning the machine, a person's fingers could be
crushed or cut off.
Allow only trained personnel to perform assembly, maintenance and service work!
Risk of injury
Improper lifting of the Geared variable speed coupling can result in equipment
WARNING
damage and personal injury.
The Geared variable speed coupling is to be suspended only from the indicated lifting
points under consideration of the 45 ±2° angle of inclination.
Improper disassembly and assembly of the Geared variable speed coupling can lead
CAUTION
to damaging the equipment and to personal injury.
Manual!
111
10 Introduction to General
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Overhaul
Environmental damage
Used oil that escapes into the soil or sewage system can cause serious damage to the
CAUTION
environment.
Leaking oil on or next to the machine could cause someone to slip or fall and be
WARNING
seriously injured.
A person could be severely injured while working on the machine when starting it up.
WARNING
Attach suitable protective covers that cannot be removed without the respective tool
between the coupling and the shaft!
Only work on the machine when the system is shut down (no power)!
Operation is only permitted after visually ensuring that no persons are in the hazard
areas!
Risk of injury
A person could burn themselves on the hot machine or on hot operational equipment.
WARNING
Only touch the machine when it has cooled down!
Not observing the correct direction of rotation could damage the machine and
WARNING
severely injure persons.
The incorrect assembly of the machine or individual parts could damage the machine.
Allow only trained personnel to perform assembly, maintenance and service work!
Note
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
The Geared variable speed coupling and removable parts of the Geared variable
speed coupling are always to be put down on a suitable surface (e.g. rubber mat).
NOTE
Note
112
10 Introduction to General
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Overhaul
Fastening/securing agents
Use fastening/securing agents that comply with the drawing specifications for "Liquid
plastic".
• clean
• oil- and grease-free.
Sealant
Sealant must meet the following criteria for use with Geared variable speed coupling:
• oil-resistant to 130 °C
• does not contain silicone
113
10 Introduction to General
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Overhaul
10.3 Preparations
NOTE
We recommend that general overhauls are only carried out by Voith mechanics
or those trained by Voith.
NOTE
1. Shut down driving machine, Geared variable speed coupling allow to cool.
6. Make the lifting appliance (crane) ready for the Geared variable speed coupling
and components removed.
Required weight information: Section 1.1 „Machine data“.
NOTE
114
10 Introduction to General
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Overhaul
Illustration 10-29:
Assemblies of the
16 Geared variable speed
coupling (only partially
displayed)
44
115
11 Drawings, Schematics,
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E Diagrams
Assembly Plan
116
Z01_20500731010_02_DE1__CRA_SPA04.tif 07.09.2011 / 13:02:16
Z01_20500731010_02_DE2__CRA_SPA05.tif 07.09.2011 / 13:01:56
Z01_91600571210_01_DE1__CRA_SPA02.tif 14.09.2012 / 11:11:33
Main Components and Instrument List
Revision No.
16 Three-phase motor Aux. lube oil pump Power supply: 380 V, 3 Ph, AC
Power : 5.5 kW
Scheme No. Order No. Code Date Type Revision Document No.
19.0 Pressure switch 0.3 - 5.0 bar ¼“ NPT IP 65 Lube oil Main motor release: 2.5 ± 0.5 1x DPDT contact
Type: 4RN-EE-45-M4-C1A --- pressure / ↑ 1.7 bar bar Housing material:
Make: SOR 3/4“ NPT downstream aluminum.
of lube oil filter Gauge board mounted
Switch rating:
5 A, 250 V AC / 0.5 A, 125 V DC
19.1 Pressure switch 0.3 - 5.0 bar ¼“ NPT IP 65 Lube oil Trip: 2.5 ± 0.5 1x DPDT contact
Type: 4RN-EE-45-M4-C1A --- pressure / ↓ 0.8 bar bar Housing material:
Make: SOR 3/4“ NPT downstream aluminum.
of lube oil filter Gauge board mounted
Switch rating:
5 A, 250 V AC / 0.5 A, 125 V DC
19.2 Pressure switch 0.3 - 5.0 bar ¼“ NPT IP 65 Lube oil Aux. lube oil pump 2.5 ± 0.5 1x DPDT contact
Type: 4RN-EE-45-M4-C1A --- pressure / OFF, with timer bar Housing material:
Make: SOR 3/4“ NPT downstream 3 min. after aluminum.
of lube oil filter main motor start-up Gauge board mounted
↑ 2.2 bar Switch rating:
5 A, 250 V AC / 0.5 A, 125 V DC
Time relay not Voith supply
Scheme No. Order No. Code Date Type Revision Document No.
19.3 Pressure switch 0.3 - 5.0 bar ¼“ NPT IP 65 Lube oil Alarm / 2.5 ± 0.5 1x DPDT contact
Type: 4RN-EE-45-M4-C1A --- pressure / aux. lube oil pump bar Housing material:
Make: SOR 3/4“ NPT downstream ON aluminum.
of lube oil filter ↓ 1.5 bar Gauge board mounted
Switch rating:
5 A, 250 V AC / 0.5 A, 125 V DC
25 Diff. pressure switch 0.2 - 2.0 bar ¼“ NPT IP 65 Diff. pressure / Alarm < 0.6 bar 1x DPDT contact
Type: 101RN-KK3-M4-C1A --- lube oil filter clean filter: Power supply:
Make: SOR 3/4“ NPT ↑ 0.6 bar 15 A, 220 V AC / 0.4 A, 110 V DC
25.1 Diff. pressure indicator 0 - 1.6 bar ½" NPT Diff. pressure / < 0.6 bar
Type: 733.51.100 lube oil filter
Make: Wika
27.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G½ IP 65 Lube oil Alarm: < 55 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 55 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B M20 x 1.5 downstream of Trip: With thermowell
Drawing No.: 42035240 cooler ↑ 60 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim
Scheme No. Order No. Code Date Type Revision Document No.
29.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G½ Lube oil Alarm: < 65 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 65 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B Thermowell upstream of cooler Trip: With thermowell
Drawing No.: 42035240 G¾ ↑ 70 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim
33.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G½ IP 65 Working oil Alarm: < 110 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 110 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B M20 x 1.5 upstream of cooler Trip: With thermowell
Drawing No.: 42035240 ↑ 130 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim
35.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G½ Working oil Alarm: <75 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 75 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B Thermowell downstream of Trip: With thermowell
Drawing No.: 42035240 G¾ cooler ↑ 85 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim
Scheme No. Order No. Code Date Type Revision Document No.
39 Scoop tube
Stroke indicator
50 Scoop tube
55 Voith
Variable Speed Turbo Coupling
56.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G 3/8 IP 65 Bearing Alarm: < 90 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 90 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B M20 x 1.5 Radial bearing 1 Trip:
Drawing No.: 42035240 B1 ↑ 95 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim
57.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G 3/8 IP 65 Bearing Alarm: < 90 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 90 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B M20 x 1.5 Radial bearing 2 Trip:
Drawing No.: 42035240 B2 ↑ 95 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim
Scheme No. Order No. Code Date Type Revision Document No.
58.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G 3/8 IP 65 Bearing Alarm: < 90 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 90 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B M20 x 1.5 Thrust bearing 3 / 4 Trip: With thermowell
Drawing No.: 42035240 B3 / B4 ↑ 95 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim
59.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G 3/8 IP 65 Bearing Alarm: < 90 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 90 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B M20 x 1.5 Radial bearing 5 Trip:
Drawing No.: 42035240 B5 ↑ 95 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim
60.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G½ IP 65 Bearing Alarm: < 90 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 90 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B M20 x 1.5 Radial bearing 6 Trip:
Drawing No.: 42035240 B6 ↑ 95 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim
61.1 Resistance thermometer 0 to 180 °C G 3/8 IP 65 Bearing header Alarm: < 90 °C Connection head material:
Type: 2 x PT 100, 3-wire-system --- temperature / ↑ 90 °C aluminum, coated
DIN IEC 751, Class B M20 x 1.5 Radial bearing 7 Trip: With thermowell
Drawing No.: 42035240 Thrust bearing 8/9 ↑ 95 °C
Make: Voith / Juchheim Bearing 10
B7 / B8 / B9 / B10
Scheme No. Order No. Code Date Type Revision Document No.
Scheme No. Order No. Code Date Type Revision Document No.
Voithstrasse 1
D-74564 Crailsheim
Tel.: 07951 / 32 - 0
Fax : 07951 / 32 - 650
VC product : R17K.2-E
Symbolic files :
File : J:\Turbo\ai-VTCR\air\BA-Doku\916\005500-006000\91600576510en.pfd
Department : airek
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Cover sheet Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 1
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
Contents
Page no. Page description
1 Cover sheet
2 Contents
3 Revision list
4 General comments
5 Pre-start conditions part 1
6 Pre-start conditions part 2
7 Pre-start conditions part 3
8 Main motor start circuit part 1
9 Main motor start circuit part 2
10 Lube oil pressure checks
11 Filter check
12 Lube oil temperature checks
13 Working oil temperature checks
14 Bearing temperature checks part 1
15 Bearing temperature checks part 2
16 Bearing temperature checks part 3
17 Bearing temperature checks part 4
18 Main motor stop circuit part 1
19 Main motor stop circuit part 2
20 Description of symbols part 1
21 Description of symbols part 2
22 Description of symbols part 3
23 Description of symbols part 4
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Contents Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 2
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
Revision list
Page Revision description Index Revision No. Date Name
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Revision list Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 3
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
This is the input side. This is the output side.
GENERAL COMMENTS
Identification of symbols for logic diagram, refer to the last 4 pages of this document.
Item numbers, see Oil Circuit and Measuring Point Scheme 91600571210.
Before test run and after each revision all switch points and connections have to be checked or adjusted.
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO General comments Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 4
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
Lube oil temperature W12
downstream of cooler
> 55 °C
item 27.1
≥1
A8
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Pre-start conditions part 1 Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 5
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
Bearing 1 temperature U14
> 90 °C
item 56.1
≥1
O8
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Pre-start conditions part 2 Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 6
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
Bearings 7, 8/9, 10
temperature
Y16
> 90° C
item 61.1
J8
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Pre-start conditions part 3 Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 7
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
A5
O6
J7
≥1
Start per-
missive
Cooling system of
heat exchanger
in operation
(operator action)
Unit ON
(Operator action)
&
C9
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Main motor start circuit Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer part 1
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 8
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
C8
&
S Main motor ON R
Main
motor
T 0
T = ..... s
E10
&
&
Normal operation
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Main motor start circuit Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer part 2
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 9
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
E9
&
&
& Alarm:
Lube oil pressure low
Trip:
S
Lube oil pressure low low
Trip:
Lube oil pressure low low
B18
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Lube oil pressure checks Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 10
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
Differential pressure
at lube oil double filter
> 0,6 bar
item 25
Alarm:
Differential pressure at lube
oil double filter high
Alarm:
Differential pressure at
lube oil double filter high
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Filter check Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 11
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
W5
S Alarm:
Lube oil temperature
downstream of cooler high
Alarm:
Lube oil temperature high
If necessary, go to
Lube oil temperature logic "Unit OFF"
downstream of cooler (operator action).
> 60 °C Trip:
items 27.1 S
Lube oil temperature
downstream of cooler
high high Trip:
Lube oil temperature high high
AI18
M5
S Alarm:
Lube oil temperature
upstream of cooler high
Alarm:
Lube oil temperature high
If necessary, go to
Lube oil temperature logic "Unit OFF"
upstream of cooler (operator action).
> 70 °C Trip:
item 29.1 S
Lube oil temperature
upstream of cooler
high high Trip:
Lube oil temperature high high
AJ18
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Lube oil Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer temperature checks
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 12
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
K5
S Alarm:
Working oil temperature
upstream of cooler high
Alarm:
Working oil temperature high
If necessary, go to
Working oil temperature logic "Unit OFF"
upstream of cooler (operator action).
> 130 °C
item 33.1
S Trip:
Working oil temperature
upstream of cooler Trip:
high high Working oil temperature
high high
AM18
L5
S Alarm:
Working oil temperature
downstream of cooler high
Alarm:
Working oil temperature high
If necessary, go to
Working oil temperature logic "Unit OFF"
downstream of cooler (operator action).
> 85 °C
item 35.1
S Trip:
Working oil temperature
downstream of cooler Trip:
high high Working oil temperature
high high
AN18
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Working oil temperature checks Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 13
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
U6
Alarm:
S
Bearing 1 temp. high
Bearing 1 temperature
> 95 °C
item 56.1 Trip:
S
Bearing 1 temp. high high
R6
Alarm:
S
Bearing 2 temp. high
≥1
G17
Bearing 2 temperature
>95 °C
item 57.1 Trip:
S
Bearing 2 temp. high high
≥1
H17
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Bearing temperature checks Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer part 1
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 14
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
F6
Alarm:
S
Bearing 3/4 temp. high
P6
Alarm:
S
Bearing 5 temp. high
≥1
T17
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Bearing temperature checks Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer part 2
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 15
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
S6
Alarm:
S
Bearing 6 temp. high
Bearing 6 temperature
> 95 °C
item 60.1 Trip:
S
Bearing 6 temp. high high
Y7
≥1
V17
Bearings 7, 8/9, 10
temperature
> 95°C Trip: Bearings 7, 8/9, 10
item 61.1 S
temp. high high
≥1
X17
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Bearing temperature checks Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer part 3
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 16
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
≥1
G14
I15
V16
Alarm:
Bearing temperature high
If necessary, go to
logic "Unit OFF"
(operator action).
≥1
H14
T15
X16
D18
Trip:
Bearing temperature high high
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Bearing temperature checks Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer part 4
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 17
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
Normal UNIT STOP
(operator action).
≥1
(lube oil pressure low) B10
(Bearing temp. high) D17
(Lube oil temp. high) AI12
≥1
(Lube oil temp. high) AJ12
(Work. oil temp. high) AM13
&
&
N19
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Main motor stop circuit Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer part 1
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 18
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
N18
Unit stopped
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Main motor stop circuit Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer part 2
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 19
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
& AND
This is the input side. S This is the output side.
The output will be in the 1-state Bistable logic function symbol
if all the connected inputs are with prevailing S input
in their defined 1-state. R
& NAND S
The output will be in the 0-state Bistable logic function symbol
if all the connected inputs are with prevailing R input
in their defined 1-state. R
≥1 OR T 0
ON - delay (8 sec)
The output will be in the 1-state T=8s
if any of the connected inputs is
in its defined 1-state.
≥1 NOR 0 T
OFF - delay (2 sec)
The output will be in the 0-state T=2s
if any of the connected inputs is
in its defined 1-state.
T1 T2 ON - delay (3 sec)
NOT (Negator/Inverter) and
3 s / 12 s OFF - delay (12 sec)
1 The output will be in the 0-state
if the input is in the defined 1-state.
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Description of symbols part 2 Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 21
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
"D"
The symbol on the right-hand side to the step symbol is an action symbol.
The action symbol could exist of 3 fields (field "A", "B" and "C").
Commands above and from left of the action symbol are input signals
and are to be treated like an AND connection.
Commands beneath the action symbol are output signals.
Field "A" descibes the correlation between the step "X" and the action "B",
the following letters are to be used:
S stored
D delayed
L time limited
P pulse shape
C conditional
Letter combinations can be used, therefore the order the letters are written is important.
For example: "A" = DSL The input signal "X" will be delayed, stored
and the action "B" limited to a certain time.
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Description of symbols part 3 Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 22
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
For example:
"A" = DSL The input signal "X" will be delayed, stored
and the action "B" limited to a certain time.
If letter c (conditional) is used the action is only enabled if the condition described under "B" is fulfilled.
The input signal "X" will be stored and the lube oil pump will be switched ON for a limited
time if the oil level is ok.
Date 11-02-18 SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO Description of symbols part 4 Order No.: 38002477
Editor M.Mayer
Date R17K.2-E Dept.airek Drawing No.: 91600576510 en Page 23
Index Rev. No. Date Name Checked 23 P.
Software-Copyright by Triple-S GmbH, Regensburg
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VOI1203/23.Feb.2004
VOITH
VOITH TURBO GmbH & Co. KG
Department : airea-Ga
Created at : 11.02.2011
Revised edition : 11.02.2011 by : Gaugler
2
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO cover sheet
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
11 power electronics EBN 853 / actuator Contrac RHD 250-10 11.02.2011 Gaugler
1 3
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO table of contents
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
junction box J1
junction box
dimensions: 600x600x210 mm
degree of
protection: IP 66
600.0
weight: approx. 30 kg
JUNCTION BOX
J1
scale: 1:10
Gland plate
530x149 mm
layout
mounting plate
J1
600
50x75mm Notes:
500
X1:65-80
50x75mm
50x75mm
50x75mm
50x75mm
Supplier: PHOENIX
400 Type: UK 2,5 N / USLKG 2,5 N
X1: 1-64
X2
( 0,2-4 mmý )
300
200
50x75mm
100
distance 70mm
2 4
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO junction box J1 /
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
view / layout
Date 11.02.2011 R 17 K.2 E Dep.: airea-Ga Page 3
Revisions Date Name Checked Original Replacing Replaced by Drawing number: 916 005 726 10 en 11 P.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
item no. see oil circuit and measuring point scheme 916 005 712 10
CLIENT
VOITH
J1 insertable jumper
5.0
SCR /5.2
-X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
WH/BU
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
WH/BU
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
ITEM ITEM ITEM
NO. 56.1 NO. 57.1 NO. 58.1
R56.1 R57.1 R58.1
3 5
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO resistance thermometer
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
PT100
Date 11.02.2011 R 17 K.2 E Dep.: airea-Ga Page 4
Revisions Date Name Checked Original Replacing Replaced by Drawing number: 916 005 726 10 en 11 P.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
item no. see oil circuit and measuring point scheme 916 005 712 10
CLIENT
VOITH
J1 insertable jumper
4.0
4.9/ SCR SCR /6.2
-X1 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
WH/BU
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
WH/BU
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
ITEM ITEM ITEM
NO. 59.1 NO. 60.1 NO. 61.1
R59.1 R60.1 R61.1
4 6
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO resistance thermometer
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
PT100
Date 11.02.2011 R 17 K.2 E Dep.: airea-Ga Page 5
Revisions Date Name Checked Original Replacing Replaced by Drawing number: 916 005 726 10 en 11 P.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
item no. see oil circuit and measuring point scheme 916 005 712 10
CLIENT
VOITH
J1 insertable jumper
4.0
5.9/ SCR
-X1 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
SCR_1 /7.8
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
WH/BU
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
WH/BU
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
ITEM ITEM ITEM
NO. 27.1 NO. 29.1 NO. 33.1
R27.1 R29.1 R33.1
5 7
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO resistance thermometer
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
PT100
Date 11.02.2011 R 17 K.2 E Dep.: airea-Ga Page 6
Revisions Date Name Checked Original Replacing Replaced by Drawing number: 916 005 726 10 en 11 P.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
item no. see oil circuit and measuring point scheme 916 005 712 10
CLIENT
VOITH
J1 insertable jumper
4.0
-X1 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
spare terminals
6.8/ SCR_1
2,5mmý
BK
W35.1
JE-LiYCY BU RD GY YE GN BN
4x2x0,5mmý
R35.1 WH RD RD WH BU BU
BU BU
WH/BU
RD/BU
RD
WH
BU
BU
ITEM
NO. 35.1
R35.1
6 8
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO resistance thermometer
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
PT100
Date 11.02.2011 R 17 K.2 E Dep.: airea-Ga Page 7
Revisions Date Name Checked Original Replacing Replaced by Drawing number: 916 005 726 10 en 11 P.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
item no. see oil circuit and measuring point scheme 916 005 712 10
CLIENT
VOITH
J1
4.0
W19.0 W19.1
™lflex 1 2 3 4 5 6 GNYE ™lflex 1 2 3 4 5 6 GNYE
7x1.0mmý 7x1.0mmý
B19.0 C1 NC1 NO1 C2 NC2 NO2 PE B19.1 C1 NC1 NO1 C2 NC2 NO2 PE
>1,7bar <0,8bar
7 9
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO pressure switch
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
item no. see oil circuit and measuring point scheme 916 005 712 10
CLIENT
VOITH
J1
4.0
W19.2 W19.3
™lflex 1 2 3 4 5 6 GNYE ™lflex 1 2 3 4 5 6 GNYE
7x1.0mmý 7x1.0mmý
B19.2 C1 NC1 NO1 C2 NC2 NO2 PE B19.3 C1 NC1 NO1 C2 NC2 NO2 PE
>2,2bar <1,5bar
8 10
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO pressure switch
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
item no. see oil circuit and measuring point scheme 916 005 712 10
CLIENT
VOITH
J1
PE
4.0 PE-BAR
spare terminals PE
E1
MOUNTING PLATE
W25
™lflex 1 2 3 4 5 6 GNYE
7x1.0mmý
>0,6bar
9 11
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO differential pressure switch
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
+ - + -
F
ITEM NO. 38.2
delivery, installation,
and connection are not
in Voith's scope of supply
CLIENT
VOITH
Y38.3
ITEM Y38.3 L N PE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 30 31 PE PE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
NO. 38.3
+ - + - + -
POWER SUPPLY + - + - + -
(190V...260V)
24V I
U
potential-free contact
max. 60V/150mA
Contrac manual scoop tube scoop tube ready end position end position 24VDC set value actual value
automatic position position for operation 0% 100%
4...20mA 4...20mA
Power electronics increase decrease
9-8: ok
Type: EBN 853
9-7: fault load max. 500ê
H1 H2 U V W BR BR PE PE 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 PE PE
W_M38/A W_M38/B
1 2 3 5 6 GNYE RD WH PK GY YE BN BU GN
™CYZ-J LIYCY
8x1,5mmý 8x0,5mmý
M38
ITEM PE PE
OPTION
Contrac heater
approx. 6W
Actuator M
3~
motor
Type: RHD 250-10 sensors
10
Date 11.02.2011 =
SEC S17 Vinh Tan II VOITH TURBO power electronics EBN 853 /
Editor Gaugler
Order no.: 38 002 477 +
actuator
Date 11.02.2011 R 17 K.2 E Dep.: airea-Ga Page 11
Contrac RHD 250-10
Revisions Date Name Checked Original Replacing Replaced by Drawing number: 916 005 726 10 en 11 P.
Z01_91500478310_00_EN1__CRA_SPA03.tif 14.09.2012 / 11:15:56
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 12 Parts List
12 Parts List
117
Betriebsanl.-Nr.:
Teileliste zur Betriebsanleitung Operating inst.No.: Datum:
Date:
14.09.2012
Parts list for instruction manual Mat.-Nummer: 216.000516
Material No.
Kennwort: Typ: Rev.: 0
Reference: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Type: Zeichnungs-Nr.: Rev.:
Drawing No.:
Gruppe Seite
Auftrags-Nr.: 38002477 R 17 K.2 E Group Page
Order No.: Blatt:
Sheet: 04 1/ 4
Genuine Voith spare parts have been designed specifically for use with the Geared
variable speed coupling. We would like to point out that original spare parts that are
not supplied by "VOITH" are also not checked and approved by us.
Installation and/or use of non-original spare parts may adversely affect the design
characteristics of the Geared variable speed coupling, thus compromising safety.
"VOITH" does not assume any responsibility for damage arising from the use of non-
original spare parts.
• C Commissioning parts
• B Basic spare part equipment
• L Long-term spare parts
NOTE
Item nos. in a drawing (e.g. 0210/0010/0040) that appear in the spare parts list
without an associated drawing group (e.g. 04) are not itemized in the drawings
and parts lists (see Section 11 „Drawings, Schematics, Diagrams“ and
Section 12 „Parts List“).
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
118
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 13 Recommended Spare Parts List
Original spare parts are supplied on the basis of the latest level of technology. Ordering spare
parts
We thus suggest that the spare parts in the recommended spare parts list be stored
on site.
NOTE
Gears may be replaced in sets only. Please send still usable shafts to Voith
Crailsheim for joint assembly and balancing with the gears.
NOTE
The primary wheel and secondary wheel are balanced together with the shafts
and the shell using a special balancing procedure. Therefore, these
components can be replaced only at Voith Crailsheim or, in exceptional cases,
under the supervision of a Voith service engineer on site using special auxiliary
means.
119
Kennwort: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Ersatzteilliste Übersicht Code:
Voithstraße 1
Survey of Spare Parts Lists Typ: R 17 K.2 E 74564 Crailsheim, Germany
Type: T el. + 4 9 7 9 5 1 32 -1 6 66
SAP Angebots-Nr.: 20 182 90 8 Serien Nr.: 8 20 8 16 3, 82 08 1 64 Fax +49 795 1 3 2-90 3
SAP Offer No.: Serial No.: coupling-service@voith.com
Lieferumfang: 21 6.00 0 5 16 Betriebsanl.-Nr.: www.voith-coupling-service.com
Scope of supply: Instruction Manual No.: Datum/Date: 201 2-09-18 Rev.No: 0
Page 1 of 9
Kennwort: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Ersatzteilliste Übersicht Code:
Voithstraße 1
Survey of Spare Parts Lists Typ: R 17 K.2 E 74564 Crailsheim, Germany
Type: T el. + 4 9 7 9 5 1 32 -1 6 66
SAP Angebots-Nr.: 20 182 90 8 Serien Nr.: 8 20 8 16 3, 82 08 1 64 Fax +49 795 1 3 2-90 3
SAP Offer No.: Serial No.: coupling-service@voith.com
Lieferumfang: 21 6.00 0 5 16 Betriebsanl.-Nr.: www.voith-coupling-service.com
Scope of supply: Instruction Manual No.: Datum/Date: 201 2-09-18 Rev.No: 0
Item No. The drawing item number is indicated in the spare parts offer/order position, enabling a clear allocation of parts
to the items stated in the spare parts lists and the drawings of the instruction manual.
Drawing Group Indicates the numbering of the drawing in which the part with the appropriate drawing item number is
contained.
Spare part id. The spare part identification classifies the spare parts in groups for which corresponding recommendations
for spare parts storage can be made by the Voith Coupling Service . Upon request, the Voith Coupling Service
prepares individual spare parts proposals for every project with one or several units.
Selection By ticking, one or several articles are being selected on item level for which an offer or an order
confirmation for spare parts needs to be prepared. It is omitted if the field "all items" was ticked and selected.
Enquiry Selection for enquiry initiating the preparation of a spare parts offer.
All items By ticking, all items with the corresponding identification are selected for which an offer or an order
confirmation needs to be prepared. If individual items are selected, that field has to remain blank.
Page 2 of 9
Kennwort: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Ersatzteilliste Übersicht Code:
Voithstraße 1
Survey of Spare Parts Lists Typ: R 17 K.2 E 74564 Crailsheim, Germany
Type: T el. + 4 9 7 9 5 1 32 -1 6 66
SAP Angebots-Nr.: 20 182 90 8 Serien Nr.: 8 20 8 16 3, 82 08 1 64 Fax +49 795 1 3 2-90 3
SAP Offer No.: Serial No.: coupling-service@voith.com
Lieferumfang: 21 6.00 0 5 16 Betriebsanl.-Nr.: www.voith-coupling-service.com
Scope of supply: Instruction Manual No.: Datum/Date: 201 2-09-18 Rev.No: 0
Page 3 of 9
Kennwort: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Ersatzteilliste Übersicht Code:
Voithstraße 1
Survey of Spare Parts Lists Typ: R 17 K.2 E 74564 Crailsheim, Germany
Type: T el. + 4 9 7 9 5 1 32 -1 6 66
SAP Angebots-Nr.: 20 182 90 8 Serien Nr.: 8 20 8 16 3, 82 08 1 64 Fax +49 795 1 3 2-90 3
SAP Offer No.: Serial No.: coupling-service@voith.com
Lieferumfang: 21 6.00 0 5 16 Betriebsanl.-Nr.: www.voith-coupling-service.com
Scope of supply: Instruction Manual No.: Datum/Date: 201 2-09-18 Rev.No: 0
Page 4 of 9
Kennwort: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Ersatzteilliste Übersicht Code:
Voithstraße 1
Survey of Spare Parts Lists Typ: R 17 K.2 E 74564 Crailsheim, Germany
Type: T el. + 4 9 7 9 5 1 32 -1 6 66
SAP Angebots-Nr.: 20 182 90 8 Serien Nr.: 8 20 8 16 3, 82 08 1 64 Fax +49 795 1 3 2-90 3
SAP Offer No.: Serial No.: coupling-service@voith.com
Lieferumfang: 21 6.00 0 5 16 Betriebsanl.-Nr.: www.voith-coupling-service.com
Scope of supply: Instruction Manual No.: Datum/Date: 201 2-09-18 Rev.No: 0
Page 5 of 9
Kennwort: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Ersatzteilliste Übersicht Code:
Voithstraße 1
Survey of Spare Parts Lists Typ: R 17 K.2 E 74564 Crailsheim, Germany
Type: T el. + 4 9 7 9 5 1 32 -1 6 66
SAP Angebots-Nr.: 20 182 90 8 Serien Nr.: 8 20 8 16 3, 82 08 1 64 Fax +49 795 1 3 2-90 3
SAP Offer No.: Serial No.: coupling-service@voith.com
Lieferumfang: 21 6.00 0 5 16 Betriebsanl.-Nr.: www.voith-coupling-service.com
Scope of supply: Instruction Manual No.: Datum/Date: 201 2-09-18 Rev.No: 0
Page 6 of 9
Kennwort: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Ersatzteilliste Übersicht Code:
Voithstraße 1
Survey of Spare Parts Lists Typ: R 17 K.2 E 74564 Crailsheim, Germany
Type: T el. + 4 9 7 9 5 1 32 -1 6 66
SAP Angebots-Nr.: 20 182 90 8 Serien Nr.: 8 20 8 16 3, 82 08 1 64 Fax +49 795 1 3 2-90 3
SAP Offer No.: Serial No.: coupling-service@voith.com
Lieferumfang: 21 6.00 0 5 16 Betriebsanl.-Nr.: www.voith-coupling-service.com
Scope of supply: Instruction Manual No.: Datum/Date: 201 2-09-18 Rev.No: 0
Page 7 of 9
Kennwort: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Ersatzteilliste Übersicht Code:
Voithstraße 1
Survey of Spare Parts Lists Typ: R 17 K.2 E 74564 Crailsheim, Germany
Type: T el. + 4 9 7 9 5 1 32 -1 6 66
SAP Angebots-Nr.: 20 182 90 8 Serien Nr.: 8 20 8 16 3, 82 08 1 64 Fax +49 795 1 3 2-90 3
SAP Offer No.: Serial No.: coupling-service@voith.com
Lieferumfang: 21 6.00 0 5 16 Betriebsanl.-Nr.: www.voith-coupling-service.com
Scope of supply: Instruction Manual No.: Datum/Date: 201 2-09-18 Rev.No: 0
Page 8 of 9
Kennwort: SEC S 17 Vinh Tan II Voith Turbo GmbH & Co.KG
Ersatzteilliste Übersicht Code:
Voithstraße 1
Survey of Spare Parts Lists Typ: R 17 K.2 E 74564 Crailsheim, Germany
Type: T el. + 4 9 7 9 5 1 32 -1 6 66
SAP Angebots-Nr.: 20 182 90 8 Serien Nr.: 8 20 8 16 3, 82 08 1 64 Fax +49 795 1 3 2-90 3
SAP Offer No.: Serial No.: coupling-service@voith.com
Lieferumfang: 21 6.00 0 5 16 Betriebsanl.-Nr.: www.voith-coupling-service.com
Scope of supply: Instruction Manual No.: Datum/Date: 201 2-09-18 Rev.No: 0
Page 9 of 9
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
14 Attaching Parts
120
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42215150
Type: BUZ
Protection: IP 65
Terminal block, 6-pole
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42035250
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
121
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S004.17.120.0088
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MV-01
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
122
All stainless steel process gauge open or solid front
Model T5500 and T6500
According EN 837-1
Nominal size 100 mm or 160 mm
Accuracy: Class 1 (DIN)
Features
• Rugged stainless steel construction
• Socket and case welded
• Protection IP54 and IP65
• Usable to full scale
• Overload protection 130%
• Dry, liquid filled or liquid less (PLUS! gauge)
• Measuring system stainless steel or Monel
• Optional contacts
Ranges
-1 ... 0 bar up to 0 ... 2.500 bar
-30 in.Hg ... 0 psi up to 0 ... 36.000 psi
Applications
Chemical and petrochemical industry
Machine and apparatus construction
Food and beverage industry
Pulp and paper industry
Order information
Size Type
System Execution Process Connection Range Engineer- Filling/Case ma- Options
material connection orientation ing units terial
(100) T5500 (S) 316L (D) IP54 (04) ½ NPT (L) Lower -1/ 0 (BAR) (=) Standard (NH) Tagging wired
1)
100 mm (1.4404) male -1/ 1,5 no filling
(DA) Dial Marking
≤ 1000 bar (L) Liquid
1)
(B) Back -1/ 3
(160) T6500 filled (02) ¼ NPT -1/ 5 (GV) Silicone (TU) Throttle plug stainless
1)
160 mm (P) Monel 400 IP65 male -1/ 9 steel
≤ 1000 bar (GV3) Silicone
1) (6B) Oxygen cleaned
(09) 9/16-18 0/ 0,6 3 cst (not for open front acc.
(M)Monel 400 UNF-2B 0/ 1 EN 837-1)
1)
tube, Aminco 0/ 1,6 (GR) Glycerin (MP) Micrometer pointer
316L 0/ 2,5
(EP) Maximum pointer,
(1.4404) (13) G ¼ B male 0/ 4 (GX) Halocar-
1) 2) adjustable
socket 0/ 6 bon
≤ 1000 bar 0/ 10 (PD) Acrylic glass
(14) G 3/8 B 0/ 16 (YW) Case ma-
1) (SG) Safety glass
(D) Ni span male 0/ 25 terial 316L
tube, 0/ 40 (1.4404) (FX) Front flange
316L (15) G ½ B male 0/ 60
1)
0/ 100 ( ) Contact (FW) Back flange
(1.4404)
socket 0/ 160 type and (BQ) Wall mounting bracket
> 1000 bar (16) M20x1,5 0/ 250 function (not for T6500)
1)
male 0/ 400 (see (UF) U-clamp
0/ 600 G1.K55/E) (not for solid front)
(KQ) R½ male 0 1000
tapered 0/1600 (SH) Red set hand stationary
1)
DIN 2999 0/2500 (LJ) Field fillable
(only for execution "D", IP65)
(KN) ½" male (AJ) Calibration 0,5% F.S.
straight (not for range 0/0,6 bar filled)
1)
(JIS,BSP) 1)
not for ranges (LL) Liquid less gauges
≤ 2,5 bar (Halocarbon filling not allowed)
(KP) 3/8" male
straight 2)
Not allowed in
(PR) Receiver gauge
1)
(JIS,BSP) 1)
not allowed combination with
(OS) Overload stop
Liquid less (LL)
with execu-
1) option
1) not for type tion L psi and others (VS) Underload stop
max. 1000 bar
T6500 on request
How to order
Size Type System Execution Process Connection Range Engineering Filling/Case Option
material connection orientation unit material
100 T5500 S D 15 L 0/16 BAR YW NH
DRESSER EUROPE GmbH Measurement & Control Website: www.dresserbae.de e-Mail: Sales@Dresserbae.de
Germany France United Kingdom
Max-Planck-Str. 1, D-52499 Baesweiler 206 Rue des Campanules, Le Mandinet East Gillibrands
P.O. Box 11 20, D-52490 Baesweiler F-77185 Lognes Skelmersdale, Lancashire WN8 9TU
Tel.: +49 (0) 24 01 80 80, Fax: +49 (0) 24 01 80 81 25 Tel.: +33 (0) 1 60 37 25 30, Fax: +33 (0) 1 60 37 25 39 Tel.: +44 (0) 16 95 52 600, Fax: +44 (0) 16 95 52 693
6. Nullpunktkorrektur 2. Pour retirer la lunette, tapoter dans le sens inverse des aiguilles
- Bei Meßgeräten mit abnehmbaren Frontring oder externer Verstell- d’une montre comme indiqué en utilisant un marteau et un tournevis
möglichkeit kann der Nullpunkt eingestellt werden. à bout plat.
- Bei Meßgeräten mit interner Nullpunktverstellung muß der Bajonett - 3. Pour installer la lunette, la serrer à fond à la main. Tourner comme
indiqué sur le schéma d’1/8 de tour pour l’étanchéité et d’1/3 de tour
Betriebsanleitung
Ring bzw. der klappbare Ring vorsichtig entfernt werden. Meßgeräte
mit geschraubtem Ring werden wie in Bild 1 dargestellt geöffnet. pour les boîtiers à bain ou hermétique. Druck- und Differenzdruckmanometer
1. Gerät (3) mit einer Schutzhülse (2) im Schraubstock einspannen. - Les manomètres différentiels ont un ajustement externe sur le côte du
2. Schraubring vorsichtig mit einem Hammer und einem großen boîtier.
Schraubendreher (1) gegen den Uhrzeigersinn lösen. - Les manomètres étalons à lunette amovible sont équipés d’une vis de
3. Nach der Nullpunktkorrektur Schraubring von Hand fest andrehen. remise à zéro sur la façade (voir schéma 2). Operating Instruction
Bei wetterfester Ausführung eine 1/8 Umdrehung, bei hermetisch 1. Desserrer la bague de verrouillage „A“ Pressure- and DP gauge
dichter und gefüllter Ausführung eine 1/3 Umdrehung nachziehen. 2. Faire tourner le bouton „B“ pour ajuster le zéro.
- Differenzdruckmeßgeräte haben eine externe Verstellmöglichkeit an 3. Serrer la vis „A“ sur le bouton „B“.
der Gehäuseseite. - L’aiguille ne peut être remise à zéro qu’après avoir libéré l’élément
- Feinmeßgeräte mit klappbarem Ring haben eine frontseitige Null- sensible de tout pression. Instruction de Service
punktkorrektur (siehe Bild 2). Manomètre et Manomètre différentiel
1. Feststellschraube A lösen. Bild / sketch / schéma
2. Mit der Justierschraube B den Nullpunkt einstellen.
3. Feststellschraube A in Justierschraube B eindrehen. 1 2
- Vor der Nullpunktkorrektur ist ein Druckausgleich erforderlich.
6. Zero adjustment
Dresser Europe GmbH
For instruments with a removable ring, bezel or external zero adjust Niederlassung Baesweiler
feature the zero can be adjusted. For the instruments with internal
zero adjustments the bayonetring or hinged ring bezel must be re- Germany/Deutschland/Allemagne
moved, for gauges with screwed ring see sketch 1 to remove the ring.
1. Hold gauge in vise with threaded nut. it is important to hold the Max - Planck - Straße 1
gauge rigidly otherwise ring lugs may be damaged. D - 52499 Baesweiler
2. To remove ring - tap counterwise as shown using hammer and large ! +49 (0) 24 01 80 80
screw driver with flat tip
3. To install ring tighten snugly by hand. Turn as per sketch 1/8 turn for
Fax: +49 (0) 24 01 80 81 25
weatherproof and 1/3 turn for liquid filled and hermetically sealed.
The differential pressure gauges have an external adjustment on the England/Angleterre
side of the case.
- Testgauges with hinged ring are equipped with a front mounted zero
Tabelle / table / tableau 3 East Gillibrands
adjustment (see sketch 2).
Skelmersdale, Lancashire WN8 9TU
max. Umgebungstemperatur / ambient temperature limits / température
1. Loosen ring locking screw A. ambiante maximum
! +44 (0) 16 95 52 600
2 Rotated knob B until required adjustment. Ausführung Fax: +44 (0) 16 95 52 693
3 Tighten screw A down on knob B. execution °C °F
The pointer can be adjusted to zero after releasing the pressure ele- type de boîtier
ment against atmosphere. hermetisch dicht
France/Frankreich
6. Réglage du zéro hermetically sealed Luft / air / air - 25 ... 50 - 10 ... 125 206 Rue des Campanules, Le Mandinet
- Pour les instrument à lunette amovible ou munis d’une système de hermetique F-77185 Lognes
remise à zéro externe, le zéro peut être. Pour les instruments munis Flüssigkeitsgefüllt Glycerin / glycerin / glycérine - 18 ... 65 0 ... 150
d’un système de réglage interne du zéro, la lunette à baïonnette ou
liquid filled ! +33 (0) 1 60 37 25 30
Silikon / silicon / silicone - 45 ... 65 - 50 ... 150
articulée peut être aisément enlevée, pour les manomètres lunette
à bain Fax: +33 (0) 1 60 37 25 39
- Füllflüssigkeit und Meßstoff müssen kompatibel sein.
visée, voir le schéma pour retirer la lunette.
- Be sure filling liquid is compatible with process fluid
1. Tenir la manomètre solidement fixé. il est important de le tenir
- S’assurer que le liquide de remplissage est compatible avec le fluide
étroitement sinon les ergots de la lunette pourraient être endomma-
de service.
gés.
GAUGE - BA Rev. I 29/08/2001
1. Montagebedingungen 1. Installation requirements 1. Conditions de montage
- Die Manometer müssen nach den in Betracht kommenden Anforderun- - The pressure gauges must be selected and installed this wise, that the - Les manomètres doivent être choisis et montés de manière à minimi-
gen ausgewählt und montiert werden. possibility of failure, resulting in injury or misapplication, is minimized. ser les possibilités d’erreurs, résultant d’un mauvais montage d’une
- Zul. Umgebungstemperatur siehe Tabelle 3. Andere Temperaturgren- - For the maximum ambient temperature see table 3. Other limits are mauvaise application.
zen sind optional mit speziellen Serien möglich. possible at special series. - Pour la température ambiante maximum, se référer au tableau 3.
2. Montage 2. Mounting D’autres limites sont possibles dans des modèles particuliers.
- Der Einbau des Meßgerätes sollte in der Nähe des Meßpunktes erfol- - The mounting of measuring instruments shall be in proximity of meas- 2. Montage
gen. Der Einbauort sollte zugänglich und frei von Erschütterungen sein. uring point, easily accessible and safe from vibrations and always co- - Le montage de mano’s doit être fait à proximité du point de mesure,
- Die Betriebsstellung muß mit der auf dem Zifferblatt angegebenen incide with the position as indicated on the dial. If no such statement is facilement accessible, exempt de vibrations et toujours coïncider avec
Gebrauchsstellung übereinstimmen. Ohne Angabe auf dem Zifferblatt printed on the dial, the gauges must be mounted in a 90° ± 5° position la position indiquée sur cadran. En standard, les manomètres doivant
ist die Gebrauchslage 90° ± 5° (Zifferblatt in vertikaler Lage). with the vertical dial. If the instrument can not protected against shock être montés à 90° ± 5° par rapport au cadran à la verticale. Protéger
- Bei extremen Bedingungen (Druckspitzen, Vibrationen) Schutzele- or vibration, use an additional movement damping feature (liquid filled les mano’s contre les chocs ou les vibrations ou utiliser un système
mente verwenden (Dämpfungselemente, Füllflüssigkeiten). or pulsation dampener). The measuring instrument must be protect d’amortissement supplémentaire (remplissage ou amortisseur). Le
- Das Meßgerät ist vor schädlichen Umwelteinflüssen, Beschädigungen, against damages, great pollution, high fluctuation of temperature and mano doit être protégé contre avaries, pollution, hautes fluctuations de
großen Temperaturschwankungen und, bei Differenzdruckmeßgeräten, one-sided heat radiation for the dp gauge. Please note the freezing température et chaleur d’un côté de l’appareil pour le mano différen-
vor einseitiger Wärmestrahlung zu schützen. point of media and choose a frost - protected place for the dp gauges. tiel. Noter la point de gel du fluide et choisir une place protégée du gel
- Differenzdruckmeßgeräte müssen frostsicher eingebaut werden. - If the process temperature at the gauge is in excess of the max. al- pour les mano’s différentiels.
- Überschreitet die Temperatur des Meßstoffes die zulässige Betriebs- lowable operation temperature, than depending of the application a - Si la température du process au niveau du mano est supérieure à la
temperatur, so muß eine ausreichend lange Meßleitung, ein Wasser- syphon, diaphragm seal or sufficient length of pipe / capillary has to be température maximum admissible, alors il sera nécessaire de monter
sackrohr oder ein Druckmittler mit Kapillarrohr vorgeschaltet werden. mounted between the pressure tap and the instrument. un siphon, un séparateur ou un capillaire suffisamment long. Utilisez
- Beim Montieren ist ein entsprechender Maulschlüssel zu verwenden. - When installing always use a wrench suitable for the flats on the toujours clefs adaptées au plats du mano. Ne jamais appliquer de for-
Es darf keine Kraft (Moment) auf das Gehäuse ausgeübt werden. instrument. Do never apply mechanical torque’s to the case. ces sur le boîtier.
3. Inbetriebnahme 3. Operation 3. Mise en service
- Ist auf dem Zifferblatt keine Begrenzungsmarke ! aufgedruckt, so ist - The operating range corresponds to the scale range or see static - L’échelle d'opération correspond à la pleine échelle sinon se référer à
der Verwendungsbereich gleich dem Anzeigebereich. Bei Differenz- pressure limit mark ! printed on the dial. For dp gauges look for the la marque ! indiquant la limite de pression. Pour les mano’s différen-
druckmeßgeräten ist der maximale statische Druck zu berücksichtigen. max. allowable static pressure. When carrying out pressure test of tiels, vérifier la pression statique maxi. Pendant les essais d’étanchéité
- Beim Abdrücken von Rohrleitungen und Kesseln darf das Meßgerät process pipes and vessels, the instrument may not exposed to the des tuyaux, les mano’s ne doivent pas être exposés hors limites indi-
nicht höher als die vorgenannten Begrenzungen belastet werden. above limits as mentioned before. The calibration temperature is + quées. La température d’étalonnage est de + 20°, chaque déviation de
- Die Bezugstemperatur beträgt + 20°C (Normaltemperatur bei betriebli- 20°, each ± 30°C deviation of this temperature adds ± one class of full ± 30° ajoute ± une classe de la valeur pleine échelle à la précision.
cher Eichung). Abweichend von der Bezugstemperatur ergibt sich je scale value to the accuracy. The instruments piping shall be between Les tuyaux vers les mano’s doivent avoir un diamètre interne entre 4
± 30°C Betriebstemperaturzunahme bzw. Abnahme ein zusätzlicher 4 and 9 mm ID, depending on the pressure and the lengths. et 9 mm, en fonction de la pression et de la longueur.
Anzeigefehler von ± 1 % bezogen auf den M. E.. - After installation of the dp gauges the measuring lines must be blowed - Après l’installation de mano’s différentiels, les lignes de mesure doi-
- Die Anschlußleitung sollte, in Abhängigkeit von Druck und Länge, through. When using liquid media, the measuring lines must be bled. vent être ventilées (purgées pour liquides).
einen Innendurchmesser von 4 ... 9 mm haben. - Until definitive operation the connection valve remains closed and the - Jusqu’à la mise en service définitive, la vanne d’isolement doit rester
- Nach Montage eines Differenzdruckmeßgerätes sind die Anschlußlei- compensation valve remains open. Please avoid one-sided charge. fermée et la vanne d’équilibrage ouverte. Faire attention aux charges
tungen auszublasen, bzw. bei flüssigen Medien zu entlüften. Bis zum - On start up for pressure gauges open the shut off valve slowly. unidirectionnels.
Einsatz bleibt das Anschlußventil geschlossen und das Ausgleichsven- - For dp gauges follow the following sequence for: - Au démarrage pour les mano’s ouvrir la vanne d’isolement lentement.
til geöffnet. Einseitige Druckbelastungen sind zu vermeiden. - Operation: 1. Open balancing valve. - Pour les mano’s différentiels, suivre les instructions suivantes pour:
- Absperrventile immer langsam öffnen. 2. Open connection valves. - Mise en service: 1. Ouvrir la vanne d’équilibrage
- Bei Inbetriebnahme von Differenzdruckmeßgeräten wie folgt vorgehen: 3. Close balancing valve. Differential pressure is indi- 2. Ouvrir les vannes d’isolement
1. Ausgleichsventil öffnen cated on dial 3. Fermer la vanne d’équilibrage. La pression
2. Anschlußventil öffnen. - Out of operation: 1. Open balancing valve. différentielle est indiquées sur le cadran
3. Ausgleichsventil schließen. Der Differenzdruck wird angezeigt. 2. Close connection valves. - Mise hors service: 1. Ouvrir la vanne d’équilibrage.
- Bei Außerbetriebnahme wie folgt vorgehen: 4. Zero or functional test 2. Fermer les vannes d’isolement.
1. Ausgleichsventil öffnen. 2. Anschlußventil schließen. - The shut off valve(s) at the pressure tap(s) for the instrument has to 4. Zéro ou test de fonctionnement
4. Nullpunktprüfung / Funktionstest be closed and the pressure has to be released to atmosphere. The - La vanne d'isolement du mano fermée, la pression doit être amenée à
- Nach dem Schließen der Absperrventile und erfolgtem Druckausgleich pointer tip must stay within the zero mark. la pression atmosphérique. L’aiguille doit rester à zéro.
muß der Zeiger im als Nullpunkt gekennzeichneten Bereich stehen. - Check for dp gauges: Close both valves at the pressure taps at the - Vérification pour les mano’s différentiels. Fermer l’ensemble des
- Bei Differenzdruckmeßgeräten steht der Zeiger bei gleichzeitigem same time. The pointer must rest within the scale range. If pointer vannes à la prise de pression en même temps. L’aiguille doit reste
Schließen der Ventile innerhalb des Anzeigebereiches. Fällt der Zei- drops the plus line leaks or the balancing valve is still open. In case of dans l’échelle. Si l’aiguille descend, la partie haute pression a des
ger, ist die Plusleitung undicht oder das Ausgleichsventil nicht ge- rising pointer the minus line leaks. If the dp gauge shows no indica- fuites ou la vanne d’équilibrage est restée ouverte. En cas montée de
schlossen. Steigt der Zeiger, ist die Minusleitung undicht. Zeigt das tion, close the minus line and open the plus line. In case the pointer l’aiguille, la partie basse pression a des fuites. Si le mano ne montre
Differenzdruckmeßgerät nichts an, Minusleitung schließen und Plus- doesn’t move the instrument is damaged. aucune indication, fermer la coté basse pression et ouvrir la haute
leitung öffnen. Bewegt sich der Zeiger nicht, so ist das Gerät defekt. 5. Maintenance pression. Si l’aiguille ne bouge pas, l’instrument est défectueux.
5. Wartung - The instrument require no special maintenance. 5. Maintenance
- Das Gerät ist wartungsfrei. - In case of any default apply for assistance from ourselves or our - L’instrument ne demande pas une maintenance particulière.
- Lassen sich Störungen nicht beheben, wenden Sie sich bitte an unsere agents. We will assist you with advice and service. - En cas de défaut, demander l’assistance de nos agents ou la nôtre.
Niederlassungen und Vertretungen, die Ihnen mit Beratung und Service Nous vous apporterons conseil et service.
zur Verfügung stehen.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten ! Modification reserved ! Sous réserve de modifications !
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S004.17.120.0088
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MV-01
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
123
Pressure Switches
for Process Applications
General Instructions
General
These instructions provide information for installation,
process connection, electrical connection, and calibration.
This type is not recommended for high-pressure fluid power
applications where high-shock pressure and high cycle rates
are expected.
Electrical Connection
CAUTION: Electrical power must be disconnected from explosion proof models before the cover is removed.
Failure to do so could result is severe personal injury or substantial plant damage.
Storing excess wire or making wire lead splices inside the pressure switch housing will interfere with pressure switch operation.
Housing Type Conduit Connection Contact Termination Contact Identification
Screw terminals Stamped on insulation
Open bracket None
Wire leads Color coded and marked
Green (GND)
NO1 NO2
Pressure
FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2
For latest revision, see www.sorinc.com
SOR Form 496 (05.02) Printed in USA Registered Quality System to ISO 9001 Page 1 of 2
Installation Calibration
1. Secure housing mounting pad to a bulkhead,
CAUTION: Switching Element has been precisely positioned
panel rack or pipe stanchion with two suitable
in the housing and overtravel adjusted at the factory for
1/4" bolts.
optimum performance. Any inadvertent movement or
2. Line mounting by either process connection or
replacement in the field will degrade performance and could
electrical conduit connection is not recommended.
render the device inoperative, unless factory authorized
3. Suggested mounting orientation is electrical con
procedures are followed.
duit connection at 6 o’clock to prevent condensate
from collecting in the housing enclosure. However, Fixed Dead Band Models
the device can be mounted in any position. Use 3/4" open-end wrench to turn hex adjusting nut clock-
wise to increase set point; counterclockwise to decrease Set
Ensure that wiring conforms to all applicable local and
national electrical codes and install unit(s) according Point. Approximate set point can be obtained by sighting
to relevant national and local safety codes. across top of adjusting nut to calibration scale on interior wall
of housing. If precise set point calibration is required, it will
Process Connection be necessary to use a regulated pressure source, a suitable
continuity tester, and a 1/4% test gauge.
Securely connect process line to pressure port using
two wrenches: one to hold hex flats on pressure port, Adjustable Dead Band Models
the other to tighten process pipe or tube fitting. Use the fixed dead band procedure (above) to calibrate
the desired decreasing pressure set point. The increasing
IMPORTANT: Use care not to loosen pressure port pressure set point can then be adjusted by turning the white
from body or body from housing. thumbwheel on the electrical switching element. Setting A
yields the smallest possible dead band. Setting F yields the
CAUTION: Failure to mount the housing on a flat widest possible dead band. Settings above E may degrade
mounting surface may result in torsional forces on the repeatability.
housing that could cause false trips or render the
pressure switch inoperative.
See SOR Catalog (Form 216) for reference dimension drawings. For certified dimension drawings, contact the factory.
14685 West 105th Street, Lenexa, Kansas 66215 913-888-2630 Fax 913-888-0767 www.sorinc.com
Page 2 of 2 Registered Quality System to ISO 9001 SOR Form 496 (05.02) Printed in USA
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F11
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
124
Series 101/121
Differential Pressure Switches
General Instructions
CAUTION: Failure to mount the housing on a flat mounting
surface may result in torsional forces on the housing that could
cause false trips or render the pressure switch inoperative.
Make
Break
Make
Differential Pressure
Break
Make
Critical Increasing Break
Set Point
Normal
Operating
Differential
Pressure
Make
Break
Make
Differential Pressure
Make
Critical
Decreasing Break
Set Point
14685 West 105th Street, Lenexa, Kansas 66215 913-888-2630 Fax 913-888-0767 www.sorinc.com
Page 4 of 4 Registered Quality System to ISO 9001 SOR Form 506 (04.05) Printed in USA
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM 07.05
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F11
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
125
Mechanical
Pressure Measurement
Applications
Special Features
T Differential pressure measuring ranges from 0 … 16 mbar
T High working pressure (static pressure) up to 40 bar
T High overpressure safety up to 40 bar
T Compatible with alarm contacts and transmitters
Description
These differential pressure gauges are made of highly Scale ranges from 0 ... 16 mbar to 0 ... 25 bar are available
corrosion-resistant stainless steel and feature an all-metal, to meet the requirements of a wide variety of applications.
all-welded media chamber to ensure long-term leak
tightness (no elastomer sealing elements).
Differential pressure gauge multi purpose model 732.14 see data sheet PM 07.13
Illustration of operating principle Design and operating principle
i j
Specifications
Design Operating temperature
WlKA trade pattern DT - GM 86 08 176 Ambient: -20 ... +60 °C
All welded construction of diaphragm and pressure Medium: +100 °C maximum
chambers
Pressure chamber below dial, bottom pressure entry Temperature effect
Other configuration feasible When temperature of the pressure element deviates from
reference temperature (+20 °C):
Nominal size max. ±0.5 %/10 K of true scale value
100 and 160 mm
Ingress protection
Accuracy class IP 54 per EN 60 529 / IEC 529
1.6 (with liquid filling IP 65)
Scale ranges
0 ... 16 mbar to 0 ... 25 bar
Scale range 0 ... 16 mbar: full scale length approx. 180 p °
or other equivalent units of pressure or vacuum
Working pressure
Steady: full scale value
Fluctuating: 0.9 x full scale value
Overpressure safety
see table page 3
Bezel ring
Cam ring (bayonet type), natural finish stainless steel
1202 707.03
2020 661.01
Bolt holes
Air bleeding
plugs
≤ 0.25 bar
Option: ≥ 0.4 bar
100 ≤ 0.25 bar 15.5 49.5 101 99 140 17.5 G¼ 171 90 114 96 118 2.70
100 > 0.25 bar 15.5 49.5 101 99 78 17.5 G¼ 171 87 114 66 88 1.90
160 ≤ 0.25 bar 15.5 49.5 161 159 140 17.5 G¼ 201 120 144 96 118 3.40
160 > 0.25 bar 15.5 49.5 161 159 78 17.5 G¼ 201 117 144 66 88 2.40
Standard pressure entry with parallel thread and seating to EN 837-1 /7.3.
Ordering information
Model / Nominal size / Scale range / Scale layout, e.g. direct pressure reading or square root incrementation /
Static pressure rating ... bar / Size and location of connection / Optional extras required
Modifications may take place and materials specified may be replaced by others without prior notice.
Specifications and dimensions given in this leaflet represent the state of engineering at the time of printing.
14.6.1 Actuator
126
&RQWUDF Rated Torque 250 Nm
Part Turn Actuator
RHD 250
(r0125rxa)
Table of Contents
Device Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Delivery State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Lubrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Electrical Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Your Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1. Device Identification
1.1 Actuator ID Label
&(
Made in Germany
3 M= Jahr/Year
4 t= IP 66
5 min......max. ....... max. .........
6 Öl / Oil:
7 Mit / With Elektronik/Electronics EBN 851 / EBS 852
8
9
10
Automation
D-32425 Minden
1. Actuator type
2. Device number / No. of non-standard version
3. Rated torque / Year of manufacture
4. Permissible ambient temperature
5. Min./max. positioning travel / Min./max. speed
6. Filled-in oil type
7. Associated electronics
8. Not used
9. Not used
10. Available for customer-specific information
2
2. General
2.1 Proper Use
Control actuators are intended to be used exclusively for actuating final control elements
(valves, vanes, etc.). Do not use these actuators for any other purpose. Otherwise, a ha-
zard of personal injury or of damage to or impairment of the operational reliability of the
device may arise.
2.2 Safety and Precautions
When mounting the actuator in areas which may be accessed by unauthorized persons,
take the required protective measures.
- Control actuators perform movements for positioning vanes and valves. Handle pro- ! Warning !
perly and with care. Otherwise, a hazard of bruise injuries may arise.
- When changing the oil of the actuator, thoroughly remove any oil that may have run
down on the floor during the procedure to avoid accidents.
- Dispose of the waste oil in compliance with the respective local regulations. Make
sure that no waste oil reaches the water cycle
- Only qualified specialists who have been trained for these tasks are authorized to
mount and adjust the control actuator, and to make the electrical connection.
- When working on the actuator itself or its electronics always observe the locally valid
accident prevention regulations and the regulations concerning the construction of
technical installations.
3. Storage
&RQWUDF actuators may be stored under moist and aggressive condition for a short
time. The equipment is protected against external corrosive influences. However, direct
exposure to rain, snow, etc. must be avoided
Interior areas of the actuator with risk of condensation are protected by desiccant placed
in the following locations:
Motor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . under brake cover
Position sensor:. . . . . . . . . . . . . .under position sensor cover
Electronics (delivered separately): . . . . in terminal enclosure
The desiccant guarantees sufficient protection for approximately 150 days. It can be re-
generated at a temperature of 90° C within 4 h.
The desiccant must be removed prior to commissioning the actuator or the electronics.
3.1 Long-time Storage
If you intend to store or transport the device for a longer time, we recommend to wrap it
in plastic foil and add desiccant. Regularly check if the desiccant is still active.
4. Delivery State
If not otherwise specified by the customer, &RQWUDF actuators are delivered with the
following standard configuration:
Behavior in 0/100% position: Shut-off with rated torque
Setpoint function: Linear; setpoint = positioning value
Input (setpoint): 4 ... 20 mA
Function: Positioner, parameter: setpoint
Output (actual value): 4 ... 20 mA
Digital inputs: DI 1 switch-over manual/automatic and v.v.
DI 2 / DI 3 manual control +/-
Digital outputs: DO 1 ready to operate, DO 2/3 end position signal-
ling
Range: Not adjusted
The configuration of your actuator may differ from the standard configuration specified
above. It can be called up for display using the configuration program.
3
5. Assemblies
1: Handwheel
2 2: Ball-and-socket
1
joint
9 3: Output lever
4: Adjustable stops
5. Output shaft
8 6. Gearbox
7. Handwheel handle
8. Motor
9. Handwheel lock
5
6
4
5.1 Operation
RHD 250-10
Rated torque [Nm] 250
Starting torque [Nm] appr. 1.2 x rated torque (break-away torque in
end positions 2 x rated torque for short time)
Rated speed [°/s] 9.0 ... 0.1
adjustable on power electronics
Motor MCS 71 BA
Weight approx. 45 kg
Associated electronics For field mounting: EBN 851
For rack mounting: EBS 852
Power supply 115 V AC (94 V ... 130 V) or 230 V AC
(on electronics) (190 V ... 260 V); 47.5 ... 63 Hz
Maximum power consumption at
115/230 V AC [A] 1.8 / 0.9
Current consumption in positioning approx. 40 ... 50% of Imax., each
mode
Table 1:
4
7. Lubrication
Prior to delivery the actuator is filled with 4.7 l oil in factory.
1) 2)
1) 1) 2)
1) 2) 1)
2) 2)
Mounting
Orientation
1) 2)
Figure 2:
7.1 Lubricants
! Warning !
Do not pollute the syn-
Oil types thetic Mobil SHC 629 oil,
nor mix it with mineral
Ambient temperature Oil type used by manufac-
Possible other oil types oils. Prior to changing
turer for first filling1)
over to synthetic lubricant
ESSO Spartan EP 220 Aral Degol BMB 220 oil always throroughly
(L-CKC to ISO TR 3498) BP Energol clean the set of gears!
- 10°C ... + 65°C GR-XP 220
Shell Omala 220
Mobilgear 630
- 30°C ... + 50°C Mobil SHC 629
Table 3:
5
8. Mounting
8.1 Actuator Check
- Is the actuator filled with the appropriate oil type?
- Is enough oil in the actuator?
- Did you fasten the separately delivered vent screw in the highest bore (depending on
the mounting orientation)?
6
tightening torque
for screw of
limit stop: 79 Nm
driving lever
a holes for
fastening screws
mechanical limit stop diameter: 12 mm
tensile strength
coupling rod of screws:
> 400 N/mm 2
- 3°
support;
stiffened against bending tightening torque
and vibration free for clamping screw: 10°
79 Nm
b
lever of flap
(d00162e1)
α ≥ 15 °
β according to dimensions specified by the valve manufacturer
L
100 ... 120 L - 220 100 ... 120 3
3 5 4 2 4
1
23
74
99
40
35,5
M 18x1,5
70
18
18
cone 1:10
55 6
M 14 x 1,5 6
95
(d00163e1)
1. Output lever
2. Link tube
3. Ball-and-socket joint
4. Welding bushings (C15 to DIN 17210)
5. Counter nuts
6. Crown nuts
7
9. Electrical Connection
9.1 Wiring Diagram
Netz / Mains
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 28 29 26 27 30 31
L N
+ - + - + - + - + + - + -
RB RB
I
24V + - + -
Uv
24V U
Han K 8 / 24
1 2 3 5 6 Einsatz / Plug 10 11 12 14 15 16 18 19 7 8
rot / red
braun /
schw. /
Heizung
brown
weiß /
grau /
rosa /
blau /
white
black
ca. 6W
grey
blue
pink
Vorsicherung /
Netz / external fuse
mains Bus in Bus out
Schraubklemmen /
screw terminals
grün /
green
grün /
green
rot /
rot /
red
red
L N
Busabschluß-
möglichkeit / T- T+ B1 A1 B2 A2
bus termination Busanschluß /
15 14 28 29 30 31 bus terminals
U V W Br Br PE Contrac 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Elektronik / electronics
AC 115 … 230 V
Stecker / plug
braun /
schw. /
weiß /
brown
Contrac Antrieb
grau /
rosa /
blau /
white
black
grey
blue
pink
M
3~ Heizung / Contrac Actuator
heater
Motor (Option) Sensoren / sensors
(r00007x1)
Figure 6: Wiring diagram for EBN 851 / EBN 861(bus connection)
The following steps must be performed to switch the actuator to automatic mode (AUT):
- Activate digital inputs DI 1, DI 2 and DI 3 via the configuration program.
- Make sure that the supply voltage is present on digital input 1 (DI 1).
- Activate AUT mode via the configuration program.
8
9.1.1 Signal Inputs and Outputs (Conventional Triggering)
(Standard)
AUT**
End Pos. 0%
0/4...20mA
0/4...20mA
End Pos.
Act.Val.
Ok
100%
+Y -Y
BE 3
BE 1
BA 2
BE 2
Transmitter
BA 1
BA 3
Uv
4...20mA (Option)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 29 30 31
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
RB + RB Contrac
No
No
No
Nc
I Power Electronics
24V + - + -
Uv
24V U
(r00358e1)
Figure 7:
** Write-protected when applying +24 V DC to DI 1.
End Pos. 0%
controller
End Pos.
0/4...20mA
Act.Val.
Ok
100%
+Y -Y
BA 2
BE 3
BE 1
BE 2
BA 1
Transmitter
BA 3
Uv
4...20mA (Option)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 26 27 28 29 30 31
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
RB + RB Contrac
No
No
No
Nc
I Power Electronics
24V + - + -
Uv
24V U
(r00359e1)
Figure 8:
** Write-protected when applying +24 V DC to DI 1.
9
10. Setup
! Note !
The commissioning and The basic settings (definition of end positions) can be made via the commissioning and
service field is located on service field (CSF). It is used for adapting the actuator to the operating range and the
the electronics! effective direction without a PC. The actuator can be set up and configured completely
using the appropriate configuration program.
(r0002rxa)
! Warning !
The actuator range is not 10.1.2 Initial Situation
preset in factory! - Electronics connected to power supply and actuator
- Write-protect switch (1) set to “OFF” position
- Electronics in operating mode “MAN” (no signal on DI 1)
- No fault (if a fault occurs, both LEDs flash alternately at 4 Hz)
10.1.3 Setup Procedure
- Undo the screws of the CSF
- Swing the cover to the side
10
10.1.3.1 “Adjustment” Mode
- Set electronics to “Adjustment” mode by pressing push buttons (3) and (5) simulta-
neously for approx. 5 seconds, until both LEDs (2 + 9) are flashing synchronously at
approx. 4Hz.
11
11. Maintenance
&RQWUDF actuators have a robust construction. As a result, they are highly reli-
able and require only little maintenance. The maintenance intervals depend upon the
effective load and are therefore not specified here.
The built-in microprocessor evaluates the actual load factors (e.g. torques, tempera-
tures, etc.) and derives the remaining operating time until the next routine mainte-
nance is required. Use the configuration program for viewing this information.
- Set the stop pin to the center position, as seen in Figure 10.
- Position the output shaft such that the groove for the fitting key is oriented up-
wards.
- Turn the potentiometer until the set screw is in 12:00 o’clock position (see Figure
10).
- Align the sensor and its gears with the actuator; set the first toothed gear in
09:00 o’clock position onto the drive shaft gear (4).
- Slightly move the sensor back and forth to pre-tension the toothed gears with the
difference “z“ until the second toothed gear snaps in.
- Fasten the screws (1) tightly.
- Fasten the cable in the connector plug (observe the color code).
2 Z 1 4
1 1
3
(r00329x1)
1
(r00006x1)
Figure 10: Position sensor SP 1 Figure 11: Mounting position of SP 1
12
12. Troubleshooting
This section only describes how to handle hardware errors. Refer to the configuration
program’s online help for errors related to the software.
1I)If actuator end position = valve end position, mount the sensor as described in sec-
tion 11.3.2.
MCS 071 BA
Winding resistance ± 5% at 20° C (motor) 42 ohms
Winding resistance ± 5% bei 20° C (brake) 2134 ohms
Table 6:
13
13. Your Notes
This technical documentation is protected by copyright law. Do not translate, copy or distribute in any way - even in a modified form or as
an excerpt - without the prior written permission of the right-holder. Also, reprints, photomechanical or electronical reproduction or storage
of data in data processing systems or data networks must be authorized by the right-holder. Any infringement of the copyright law will be
prosecuted
Description:
Section 7.3.3 „Changing over the duplex oil filter“
Section 8.4 „Cleaning the duplex oil filter“
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
127
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Power: 5.5 KW
Voltage: 220/380
Frequency: 50 Hz
Speed: 1500 rpm
Degree of protection: IP55
Design: B5
128
Low Voltage Motors
Manual for Low Voltage Motors
Manuel d’installation,
d’exploitation et de
maintenance FR 27
Asennus-, käyttö- ja
kunnossapito-ohje FI 75
EC Declaration of Conformity
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC), regarding the intrinsic
characteristics to emission and immunity levels,
EN 60 034-1
Additional Information :-
By design, the machines, considered as components, comply with the essential requirements of
Machinery Directive 98/37/EEC provided that the installation be correctly realised by the manufacturer
of the machinery (for example : in compliance with our Installation Instructions and EN 60 204 “Electri-
cal Equipment of Industrial Machines”).
Certificate of Incorporation (Directive 98/37/EEC, Art 4.2 and Annex II, Sub B) :
The machines above must not be put into service until the machinery into which they have
been incorporated have been declared in conformity with the Machinery Directive.
Signed by ..................................................
Title ...........................................................
Date ..........................................................
GB
Contents Page
1. General ................................................................................................................................. 4
1.1 Declaration of Conformity ............................................................................................ 4
1.2 Validity ........................................................................................................................ 4
2. Installation ........................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Putting into service (starting) ....................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Reception check .............................................................................................. 4
2.1.2 Insulation resistance check .............................................................................. 4
2.1.3 Direct-on-line or star/delta starting ................................................................... 5
2.1.4 Terminals and direction of rotation .................................................................. 5
2.2 Handling ...................................................................................................................... 5
2.2.1 Storage ............................................................................................................ 5
2.2.2 Transportation.................................................................................................. 5
2.2.3 Lifting ............................................................................................................... 5
2.2.4 Machine weights .............................................................................................. 6
2.3 Installation .................................................................................................................... 6
2.3.1 Cooling............................................................................................................. 6
2.3.2 Foundation ....................................................................................................... 6
2.3.3 Alignment ......................................................................................................... 6
2.3.4 Slide rails and belt drives ................................................................................. 6
2.4 Connection ................................................................................................................... 7
2.4.1 Connection for variable speed drive ................................................................ 7
2.5 Balancing ........................................................................................................................ 7
3. Operating ............................................................................................................................. 8
3.1 Use ............................................................................................................................... 8
3.1.1 Operating conditions ........................................................................................ 8
3.2 Safety considerations ................................................................................................... 8
3.2.1 Points to observe ............................................................................................. 8
3.3 Assembly and dismantling ........................................................................................... 8
3.3.1 General ............................................................................................................ 8
3.3.2 Bearings........................................................................................................... 8
3.3.3 Fitting coupling halves and pulleys .................................................................. 8
4. Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 9
4.1 Maintenance and lubrication ........................................................................................ 9
4.1.1 General inspection ........................................................................................... 9
4.1.2 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 9
4.1.3 Machines with permanently greased bearings ................................................ 9
4.1.4 Motors with regreasing nipples ........................................................................ 9
4.1.5 Lubrication intervals and amounts ................................................................... 10
4.1.6 Lubricants ........................................................................................................ 10
4.1.7 Frequency converter drives ............................................................................. 11
4.1.8 Spare parts ...................................................................................................... 11
4.1.9 Rewinding ........................................................................................................ 11
5. Environmental requirements ............................................................................................. 11
5.1 Noise levels .................................................................................................................. 11
6. Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 12
GB
The machine should always be stored indoors, in dry,
vibration free and dust free conditions.
2.1.3 Direct-on-line or star/delta
starting Unprotected machined surfaces (shaft-ends and
flanges) should be protected with anti-corrosive
The terminal box on standard single speed machines treatment.
normally contains 6 winding terminals and at least one
earth terminal. It is recommended that shafts be rotated periodically by
hand to prevent grease migration.
Earthing must be carried out according to local
regulations before the machine is connected to the Anti condensation heaters, if fitted, should preferably be
supply voltage. energised.
The voltage and connection are stamped on the rating The characteristics of electrolytic capacitors, if fitted to
plate. single-phase motors, will require “reforming” following
periods of storage exceeding 1-2 years.
Direct-on-line starting (DOL): Contact ABB Sales Office for details.
Y or D winding connections may be used.
e.g. 660 VY, 380 VD indicates Y-connection for 660 V
2.2.2 Transportation
and D-connection for 380 V. Machines fitted with cylindrical-roller and/or angular
contact bearings must be fitted with locking devices
Star/Delta starting (Y/D): during transport.
The supply voltage must be equal to the rated voltage
of the machine in D-connection. 2.2.3 Lifting
Remove all connection links from the terminal block. Lift the motor using the lifting lugs only, if not otherwise
For two-speed, single phase and special machines, stated in the separate lifting instruction.
supply connection must follow the instructions inside The center of gravity of motors with the same frame
the terminal box. may vary due to different outputs, mounting
If direct-on-line starting lasts for more than 10 seconds arrangements and auxiliary equipment.
or Y/D starting more than 30 seconds, consult ABB Check that eyebolts or the lifting lugs integrated with the
Sales Office or see the publication ‘The Motor Guide' motor frame are undamaged before lifting. Damaged
(also available on the internet on www.abb.com/ lifting lugs must not be used.
motors&drives).
Lifting eyebolts must be tightened before lifting.
If needed the position of the eyebolt must be adjusted
2.1.4 Terminals and direction of with suitable washers.
rotation
Ensure that proper lifting equipment is used and that
Direction of rotation is clockwise when viewing the shaft the sizes of the hooks are suitable for the lifting lugs.
face at the machine drive end, when the line phase
sequence L1, L2, L3 is connected to the terminals as Care must be taken not to damage auxiliary equipment
shown in the figure 1. and cables attached to the motor.
GB
Some machines are available with top mounted terminal
boxes rotatable 4 x 90°, and some with side mounted
terminal boxes.
Driven machinery
Availability of these solutions is described in the product
catalogues.
Unused cable entries must be closed. To comply with EMC-requirements, use only cables and
As well as main winding and earthing terminals, the connectors approved for this purpose. (See instruction
terminal box can also contain connections for for frequency converters.)
thermistors, standstill heating elements, bimetallic, The highest permissible rotational speed of a cast iron
switches, or PT 100 resistance elements. motor used in variable speed drive (M2BA/M3BP) must
not exceed maximum permissible speeds as stated in
WARNING the table 2 below or the speed stamped on the rating
Voltage may be connected at standstill inside the plate. For information on the highest permissible
terminal box for heating elements or direct winding rotational speed for other motor sizes and types, please
heating. contact ABB. Bearing lubrication should follow the
directions mentioned later.
Connection diagrams for auxiliary elements are found Frame Speed r/min
inside the terminal box cover or in additional labels on size 2 pole 4 pole
the frame of the machine.
280 3600 2600
315 3600 2300
WARNING
The capacitor in single-phase motors can retain 355 3600 2000
a charge that appears across the motor terminals, 400 3600 1800
even when the motor has reached standstill. 450 3600 1800
GB
should be considered.
4.1.1 General inspection
– Inspect the machine at regular intervals. 4.1.4 Motors with regreasing nipples
– Keep the machine clean and ensure free
ventilation airflow. Lubrication information plate and general
– Check the condition of shaft seals (e.g. V-ring) and lubrication advice
replace if necessary.
If the machine is fitted with a lubrication information
– Check the condition of connections and mounting
plate, follow the given values.
and assembly bolts.
– Check the bearing condition by listening for On the lubrication information plate, regreasing intervals
unusual noise, vibration measurement, bearing with regard to mounting, ambient temperature and
temperature, inspection of spent grease or SPM speed of rotation can be defined.
bearing monitoring.
* When changes of condition occur, During the first start or after a bearing lubrication it may
dismantle the machine, check the parts appear a temporary temperature rise, appr. 10-20
and replace if necessary. hours. ABB policy is to have reliability as a vital issue in
bearing lubrication intervals. That is why we follow the
L1-principle.
4.1.2 Lubrication
A. Manual lubrication
WARNING Regreasing while motor is running
Beware of all rotating parts! – Remove grease outlet plug or open closing valve if
fitted.
WARNING – Be sure that the lubrication channel is open
Grease can cause skin irritation and eye – Press the specified amount of grease into the
inflammation. Follow all safety precautions bearing.
specified by the manufacturer. – Let the motor run 1-2 hours to ensure that all
excess grease is forced out of the bearing.
Close the grease outlet plug or closing valve if fitted.
4.1.3 Machines with permanently
Regreasing while motor is at a standstill
greased bearings Regrease motors while running. If this is not possible,
Bearings are usually permanently greased bearings of lubrication can be carried out while the machine is at a
either Z or 2Z types. standstill.
Bearing types are specified in the respective product – In this case, use only half the quantity of grease, then
catalogues and on the rating plate of all our motors run the motor for a few minutes at full speed.
except smaller frame sizes. – When the motor has stopped, press the rest of the
specified amount of grease into the bearing.
As a guide, adequate lubrication for sizes up to 200 can – After 1-2 running hours close the grease outlet plug
be achieved for the following duration, according to L1 or closing valve if fitted.
(i.e. that 99 % of the motors are sure to make the
interval time) at ambient temperature of 25°C. For B. Automatic lubrication
duties with ambient temperatures higher than 25°C, The grease outlet plug must be removed permanently
see the respective product catalogue. with automatic lubrication or open closing valve if fitted.
Some motors may be equipped with a collector for old
Frame size Poles Duty hours grease. Follow the special instructions given for the
56-80 2-8 for life equipment.
90-112 2-8 40 000
We recommend only the use of electromechanical
132 2-8 40 000
systems. Contact your local ABB Sales Office.
160 2-8 40 000
180 2-8 40 000 The amount of grease per each lubrication interval
200 2 27 000 stated in the tables 4-5 should be doubled if an
200 4 40 000 automatic regreasing system is used.
Table 3 If 2-pole motors are being automatically regreased, the
note (NOTE!) concerning lubricant recommendations
Depending on application and load conditions, see given for 2-pole motors in the chapter Lubricants shall
applicable product catalogue. be followed.
size of grease r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min r/min temperature 80°C (ambient temperature of about
g/bearing + 25°). Note! An increase in the ambient temperature
Ball bearings
raises the temperature of the bearings correspondingly.
Lubrication intervals in duty hours
112 10 10000 13000 18000 21000 25000 28000
The values should be halved for 15°C increase in
132 15 9000 11000 17000 19000 23000 26500 bearing temperature and may be doubled for 15°C
160 25 7000 9500 14000 17000 21000 24000 decrease in bearing temperature.
180 30 6000 8000 13500 16000 20000 23000
200 40 4000 6000 11000 13000 17000 21000
225 50 3000 5000 10000 12500 16500 20000
WARNING
250 60 2500 4000 9000 11500 15000 18000 The maximum operating temperature of the grease
280 70 20001) 35001) 8000 10500 14000 17000 and bearings must not be exceeded.
1) 1)
315 90 6500 8500 12500 16000
1) 1)
355 120 4200 6000 10000 13000
400 120 1)
1)
1)
1)
4200 6000 10000 13000 4.1.6 Lubricants
400 M3BP 130 2800 4600 8400 12000
450 140 2400 4000 8000 8800
WARNING
Table 4
Do not mix different types of grease.
Roller bearings Incompatible lubricants may cause bearing
Lubrication intervals in duty hours damage.
160 25 3500 4500 7000 8500 10500 12000
180 30 3000 4000 7000 8000 10000 11500
200 40 2000 3000 5500 6500 8500 10500 When regreasing, use only special ball bearing grease
225 50 1500 2500 5000 6000 8000 10000 with the following properties:
250 60 1300 2200 4500 5700 7500 9000 – good quality grease with lithium complex soap and
280 70 10001) 20001) 4000 5300 7000 8500
1) 1)
with mineral- or PAO-oil
315 90 3300 4300 6000 8000
355 120 1) 1)
2000 3000 5000 6500 – base oil viscosity 100-160 cST at 40°C
400 120 1) 1)
2000 3000 5000 6500 – consistency NLGI grade 1.5 - 3 *)
400 M3BP 130 1) 1)
1400 2300 4200 6000 – temperature range -30°C - +120°C, continuously.
450 140 1200 2000 4000 4400
*) For vertical mounted motors or in hot conditions a
Table 5 stiffer end of scale is recommended.
1)
Values for IEC sizes 280 to 450 (cast iron and steel motors) in certain
motor types (3600 and 3000 r/min), see tables 6-7. Grease with the correct properties is available from all
major lubricant manufacturers.
Lubrication intervals and amounts, 2-pole, Admixtures are recommended, but a written guarantee
IEC frame sizes 280 to 450 must be obtained from the lubricant manufacturer
Frame Amount 3600 3000 especially concerning EP admixtures, that admixtures
size of grease r/min r/min
g/bearing do not damage bearings or the properties of lubricants
Ball bearings at the operating temperature range.
Lubrication intervals in duty hours
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500 WARNING
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000 Lubricants containing EP admixtures are not
355 M3B* 35 1200 2000 recommended in high bearing temperatures in
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000 frame sizes 280 to 450.
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600
450 M3B* 40 1000 1600
If the ambient temperature is below -25°C or above
Table 6 +55°C, or bearing temperature is above 110°C, consult
Roller bearings ABB Sales Office regarding suitable grease.
Lubrication intervals in duty hours
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800 The following high performance grease can be used
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 – Esso Unirex N2, N3 or S2 (lithium complex base)
355 M3B* 35 600 1000 – Mobil Mobilith SHC 100 (lithium complex base)
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 – Shell Albida EMS 2 (lithium complex base)
400 M3B* 40 500 800 – SKF LGHQ 3 (lithium complex base)
450 M3B* 40 500 800
– Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41-132
Table 7 (special lithium base)
– FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (lithium complex base)
Lubrication intervals for other grease fullfilling the
required properties, contact your local ABB Sales
Office.
GB
and 400 2-pole machines, where the speed factor is
higher than 400 000 (calculated as Dm x n where 5.1 Noise levels
Dm = average bearing diameter, mm; n = rotational
speed, r/min). Most of our motors have a sound pressure level not
exceeding 82 dB(A) refer to 50 Hz sinusoidal supply
The following grease can be used: conditions, tolerance ± 3 dB(A).
– FAG L69 (polyurea base)
Values for specific machines can be found in the
– Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (polyurea base)
relevant product catalogues.
– Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (polyurea base)
For sound pressure levels for 60 Hz sinusoidal supply
If other lubricants are used, check with the
and with non-sinusoidal supplies, contact ABB Sales
manufacturer that the qualities correspond to those of
Office.
the above mentioned lubricants, or if the compatibility of
the lubricant is uncertain, contact your local ABB Sales Sound pressure levels for all machines having separate
Office. cooling systems and for series M2F*/M3F*, M2L*/M3L*,
M2R*/M3R*, M2BJ/M3BJ and M2LJ/M3LJ are indicated
WARNING in separate Manuals.
Especially in high rotational speed (the speed
factor > 400000) over greasing may cause
damage.
WARNING
The constructional maximum speed of the motor
must not be exceeded (see table 2).
4.1.9 Rewinding
Rewinding should always be carried out by qualified
repair shops.
Smoke venting and other special motors should not be
rewound without first contacting ABB.
GB
clogged with dirt and prevent proper stream of air from the motor.
ventilation of motor
Motor may have one phase open Check to make sure that all leads are well
connected.
Grounded coil Locate and repair.
Unbalanced terminal voltage Check for faulty leads, connections and
transformers.
Motor vibrates Motor misaligned Realign.
Weak support Strengthen base.
Coupling out of balance Balance coupling.
Driven equipment unbalanced Rebalance driven equipment.
Defective bearings Replace bearings.
Bearings not in line Line up properly.
Balancing weights shifted Rebalance motor.
Contradiction between balancing of Rebalance coupling or motor.
rotor and coupling (half key - full key)
Polyphase motor running single Check for open circuit.
phase
Excessive end play Adjust bearing or add shim.
Scraping noise Fan rubbing fan cover Remove interference.
Fan striking insulation Clear fan.
Motor loose on bedplate Tighten holding bolts.
Noisy operation Airgap not uniform Check and correct bracket fits or bearing.
Rotor unbalance Rebalance.
Hot bearings ball Bent or sprung shaft Straighten or replace shaft.
Excessive belt pull Decrease belt tension.
Pulleys too far away Move pulley closer to motor bearing.
Pulley diameter too small Use larger pulleys.
Misalignment Correct by realignment of drive.
Insufficient grease Maintain proper quality of grease in bearing.
Deterioration of grease or lubricant Remove old grease, wash bearings thoroughly
contaminated in kerosene and replace with new grease.
Excess lubricant Reduce quantity of grease, bearing should not
be more than 1/2 filled.
Overloaded bearing Check alignment, side and end thrust.
Broken ball or rough races Replace bearing, first clean housing thoroughly.
DE
Inhalt Seite
1. Allgemein .........................................................................................................................16
1.1 Konformitätserklärung ..............................................................................................16
1.2 Gültigkeit ..................................................................................................................16
2. Installation .......................................................................................................................16
2.1 Inbetriebnahme (Anlassen) ......................................................................................16
2.1.1 Eingangsprüfung..........................................................................................16
2.1.2 Prüfung des Isolationswiderstandes ............................................................16
2.1.3 Direkteinschaltung oder Stern-Dreieck-Anlauf .............................................17
2.1.4 Anschlussklemmen und Drehrichtung .........................................................17
2.2 Handhabung ............................................................................................................17
2.2.1 Lagerung......................................................................................................17
2.2.2 Transport .....................................................................................................17
2.2.3 Anheben ......................................................................................................17
2.2.4 Gewichte ......................................................................................................18
2.3 Installation ................................................................................................................18
2.3.1 Kühlung........................................................................................................18
2.3.2 Fundamentierung.........................................................................................18
2.3.3 Ausrichtung ..................................................................................................19
2.3.4 Spannschienen und Riementriebe ...............................................................19
2.4 Anschluss .................................................................................................................19
2.4.1 Anschlüsse bei Betrieb an Frequenzumrichtern ..........................................19
2.5 Auswuchten .............................................................................................................20
3. Betrieb ..............................................................................................................................20
3.1 Verwendung .............................................................................................................20
3.1.1 Betriebsbedingungen ...................................................................................20
3.2 Sicherheitshinweise .................................................................................................20
3.2.1 WICHTIG! ....................................................................................................20
3.3 Montage und Demontage ........................................................................................21
3.3.1 Allgemein .....................................................................................................21
3.3.2 Lager............................................................................................................21
3.3.3 Anbau von Kupplungshälften und Riemenscheiben ....................................21
4. Wartung ............................................................................................................................21
4.1 Wartung und Schmierung ........................................................................................21
4.1.1 Allgemeine Kontrolle ....................................................................................21
4.1.2 Schmierung..................................................................................................21
4.1.3 Motoren mit dauergeschmierten Lagern ......................................................21
4.1.4 Motoren mit Nachschmiersystem ................................................................22
4.1.5 Schmierintervalle und Fettmengen ..............................................................22
4.1.6 Schmierstoffe ...............................................................................................23
4.1.7 Betrieb an Frequenzumrichtern ...................................................................24
4.1.8 Ersatzteile ....................................................................................................24
4.1.9 Neuwicklung ................................................................................................24
5. Umgebungsanforderungen ............................................................................................24
5.1 Geräuschpegel .........................................................................................................24
6. Motor-Störungssuchtabelle ...........................................................................................25
Die Konformitätserklärung erfüllt überdies die Anforde- Die Motorwelle muss von Hand frei drehbar sein,
rungen einer Herstellererklärung gemäß der Maschi- gegebenenfalls angebrachte Transportsicherungen sind
nenrichtlinie 98/37/EWG, Art 4.2 Annex II, sub B. zu entfernen.
Halten Sie die zulässigen Lagerbelastungswerte, die im
Produktkatalog angegeben sind strikt ein.
1.2 Gültigkeit Motoren mit Rollenlagern: Der Betrieb der Motoren
Die Betriebsanleitung bezieht sich auf die nachfolgend ohne ausreichende Radialkraft auf die Welle kann zur
genannten Baureihen aus dem Produktionsprogramm Beschädigung des Rollenlagers führen.
von ABB. Sie gilt sowohl für die Verwendung als Motor
Motoren mit Schrägkugellagern: Der Betrieb des
wie auch für den Betrieb als Generator.
Motors ohne ausreichende Axialkraft auf die Welle in
Baureihe MT*, MBT*, MXMA, der vorgesehenen Richtung kann zur Beschädigung
Baureihe M2A*/M3A*, M2B*/M3B*, M2C*/M3C*, des Schrägkugellagers führen.
M2F*/M3F*, M2L*/M3L*, M2M*/M3M*, M2Q*,
Motoren mit Nachschmiernippeln:
M2R*/M3R*, M2V*/M3V*
Bei Inbetriebnahme der Motoren oder nach einer
in den Achshöhen 56 - 450. längeren Lagerzeit ist mindestens die angegebene
Fettmenge einzufüllen, bis an der Fettauslassöffnung
Es gibt separate Handbücher z. B. für Ex-Motoren‚
neues Fett austritt.
Low voltage motors for hazardous areas: Installation,
operation and maintenance manual‘ (Low Voltage Genauere Angaben hierzu enthält der Abschnitt
Motors/Manual for Ex-Motors). „Motoren mit Nachschmiersystem“ auf der Seite 22.
Für Sonderausführungen oder spezielle Anwendungen
werden gegebenenfalls zusätzliche Hinweise benötigt. 2.1.2 Prüfung des
Zusätzliche Informationen sind verfügbar für die Isolationswiderstandes
folgenden Motoren:
Vor der Inbetriebnahme - sowie immer dann, wenn
– Rollgangs-Motoren Hinweise auf erhöhte Feuchtigkeit vorliegen - ist der
– Wassergekühlte Motoren Isolationswiderstand zu prüfen.
– IP 23 Motoren
RDer Widerstand - gemessen bei 25 ° C mit einem
– Brandgas-Entlüftungsmotoren
Isolationsprüfer (500 V DC) - soll den nachfolgenden
– Bremsmotoren
Bezugswert nicht unterschreiten: 10 MOhm (gemessen
– dauermagneterregte Motoren
mit Megger 500 V DC)
WARNUNG
Um die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages
auszuschließen, sind die Wicklungen unmittelbar
nach der Messung zu entladen.
DE
Feuchte innerhalb der Wicklung zu groß und eine die Welle im Uhrzeigersinn, wenn die Phasen L1, L2,
Trocknung wird erforderlich. Für 12h ... 16h sollte dabei L3 der Versorgungsspannung entsprechend dem Bild 1
eine Ofentemperatur von 90 ° C eingehalten werden, angeschlossen sind.
gefolgt von einer Schlusstrocknung mit 105 ° C für Die Drehrichtung ändert sich, wenn beliebige zwei
6h ... 8h. Anschlussleitungen vertauscht werden.
Etwaig vorhandene Verschlussstopfen von Wenn der Motor mit einem drehrichtungsabhängigen
Entwässerungsöffnungen sind während der Lüfter ausgerüstet ist, muss die Übereinstimmung der
Wärmebehandlung zu entfernen und ggf. vorhandene Drehrichtung mit dem auf dem Motor angebrachten
Schließventile sind zu öffnen. Pfeilsymbol zu überprüft werden.
Wicklungen, die mit Salzwasser in Berührung
gekommen sind, müssen in der Regel erneuert werden. 2.2 Handhabung
2.1.3 Direkteinschaltung oder 2.2.1 Lagerung
Stern-Dreieck-Anlauf Die Motoren sind im Innern geschlossener Räume
Der Klemmenkasten von eintourigen Standardmotoren trocken sowie schwingungs- und staubfrei zu lagern.
enthält in der Regel sechs Anschlussklemmen und Ungeschützte, bearbeitete Oberflächen (Wellenenden
zumindest eine Erdungsklemme. und Flansche) sind mit Korrosionsschutzmitteln zu
Die Erdung sollte vor dem Anschließen der behandeln.
Versorgungsspannung im Einklang mit den jeweils Es wird im Interesse einer gleichmäßigen Schmierung
gültigen Vorschriften erfolgen. empfohlen, die Welle regelmäßig von Hand zu drehen.
Spannung und Anschlussart sind auf dem Etwaig vorhandene Heizelemente sollten bestromt
Leistungsschild angegeben. werden.
Direkteinschaltung (DOL): Die für den Betrieb von Einphasenmotoren ggf.
Wahlweise kann Stern- (Y) oder Dreieckschaltung (D) verwendeten Elektrolytkondensatoren müssen nach
verwendet werden. 1- bis 2 jähriger Lagerung „formiert“ werden. Nähere
Informationen erhalten Sie von ABB.
Die Angabe 660 VY, 380 VD bezeichnet beispielsweise
die Anschlussart „Stern“ für 660 V und „Dreieck“ für
380 V. 2.2.2 Transport
Motoren, die mit Rollenlagern oder Schrägkugellagern
Stern-Dreieck-Anlauf (Y/D): ausgerüstet sind, sollten während des Transports mit
Die Versorgungsspannung muß gleich der für die Feststellvorrichtungen (Transportsicherungen) versehen
Dreieckschaltung angegebenen Spannung sein. sein.
Alle Verbindungslaschen am Klemmenblock sind zu
entfernen. 2.2.3 Anheben
Bei polumschaltbaren Typen und Wechselstrom- Der Motor darf nur an den hierfür vorgesehenen
motoren sowie bei Sonderausführungen sind die Hebeösen angehoben werden, sofern in den
entsprechenden Angaben im Klemmenkasten zu Anweisungen nichts anderes angegeben ist.
beachten.
Die Lage des Schwerpunktes kann auch bei Motoren
Falls die Direkteinschaltung länger als 10 Sekunden gleicher Baugröße aufgrund unterschiedlicher
oder Stern-Dreieck-Anlauf länger als 30 Sekunden Leistungen, Montagevarianten oder Hilfseinrichtungen
dauern, wenden Sie sich an ABB oder lesen Sie im variieren.
Motoren-Handbuch nach. (Sie finden es auch im
Internet auf Seite www.abb.com/motors&drives).
Ösenschrauben vor dem Anheben festziehen. Falls Gemäß den einschlägigen Motornormen gelten
erforderlich die Position der Ösenschraube mit Hilfe von Temperaturen bis maximal 40 ° C (bei
Unterlegscheiben anpassen. Marineanwendungen +45 oder 50 ° C) als normale
Umgebungstemperaturen. Daher ist zu überprüfen, ob
Es dürfen nur geeignete Hebeeinrichtungen und Haken am Motor eine ausreichende Luftströmung vorhanden
in für die jeweiligen Hebeösen geeigneter Größe ist. Außerdem muss sichergestellt werden, dass in der
verwendet werden. Nähe befindliche Anlagen, Oberflächen oder direkte
Es ist darauf achten, dass Hilfseinrichtungen am Motor Sonneneinstrahlung keine zusätzliche Wärme-
sowie am Motor angeschlossene Kabel nicht belastung für den Motor darstellen. Weitere
beschädigt werden. Informationen zu höheren Umgebungstemperaturen
und zur Kühlung sind dem „Motoren-Handbuch“ zu
entnehmen oder von ABB erhältlich.
2.2.4 Gewichte
Das Gesamtgewicht der Motoren kann innerhalb einer 2.3.2 Fundamentierung
Baugröße (Achshöhe) entsprechend der
Bemessungsleistung, den unterschiedlichen Bauformen Der Käufer trägt die volle Verantwortung für
und in Abhängigkeit von etwaig vorhandenen Vorbereitung des Maschinenfundaments.
Zusatzbaugruppen variieren. In Metall ausgeführte Fundamente sollten einen
Die nachfolgende Tabelle - bezogen auf die korrosionsschützenden Anstrich aufweisen.
Grundausführung - näherungsweise die Die Fundamente sind eben und hinreichend steif
Maximalgewichte für Motoren in Abhängigkeit von der auszuführen, um den erhöhten Kräften im
Baugröße und dem verwendeten Gehäusewerkstoff. Kurzschlussfall standzuhalten. Darüber hinaus sind die
Genauere Gewichtsangaben zu den einzelnen Motoren Fundamente so zu dimensionieren, dass Schwingungen
sind bei Motoren mit einem Gewicht über 25 kg auf dem aufgrund von Resonanzen ausgeschlossen sind.
Leistungsschild enthalten. Vor Montage des Motors muss die Fundamentfläche für
die Ausgleichsscheiben bzw. die Füße frei von dicken
Aluminium Grauguss Stahl Lackrückständen und -tropfen sowie Schmutz sein.
Bau- Gewicht Add. Gewicht Gewicht Dann muss geprüft werden, ob es zwischen den
größe kg für Bremse kg kg einzelnen Aufstellflächen für die Füße
56 4.5 - - - Höhenunterschiede gibt. Zudem muss geprüft werden,
63 6 - - - ob die Aufstellflächen für die Füße eben sind Die
71 8 5 13 - Anforderungen sind in der folgenden Abbildung
80 12 8 20 - dargestellt.
90 17 10 30 -
100 25 16 40 - Richtscheit mit Hinweis!
112 36 20 50 - Wasserwaage Der Höhenunterschied
132 63 30 90 - zwischen den Flächen
160 110 30 175 - darf ± 0,1 mm nicht
180 160 45 250 - überschreiten.
200 220 55 310 -
225 295 75 400 -
250 370 75 550 -
280 405 - 800 600
315 - - 1700 1000 Fußposition
355 - - 2700 2200
400 - - 3500 3000
450 - - 5000 4500 Fundamentanker
Die Ankerschrauben sind mit den Füßen des Motors
Tabelle 1 zu verschrauben, wobei Ausgleichsscheiben
(1 mm ... 2 mm dick) zwischen die Füße des Motors
und die Ankerschrauben einzufügen sind.
Anschließend ist der Motor mit geeigneten Hilfsmitteln
sorgfältig auszurichten. Die Ankerschrauben können
nun mit Zement vergossen werden. Nach Prüfung der
Ausrichtung können gegebenenfalls Bohrungen für
Positionierstifte hergestellt werden.
DE
Entwässerungsöffnungen verschlossen sein.
WARNUNG
2.3.3 Ausrichtung Bei Einphasenmotoren kann die Restladung des
Kondensators auch beim Stillstand des Motors
Die sorgfältige Ausrichtung ist von entscheidender eine elektrische Spannung über den
Bedeutung für das Vermeiden von Lagerschäden, Motorklemmen zur Folge haben!
Schwingungen und möglichen Brüchen der
Wellenenden. 2.4.1 Anschlüsse bei Betrieb an
Frequenzumrichtern
2.3.4 Spannschienen und
Frequenzumrichter-Antriebe verursachen höhere
Riementriebe Spannungsbelastungen der Wicklungen und des Motors
– Die Befestigung des Motors auf den Spannschienen als eine sinusförmige Einspeisung. Sie können
erfolgt wie auf dem Bild 2. hochfrequente Wellenspannungen und Lagerströme
– Die Spannschienen sind horizontal und auf gleicher verursachen. Deshalb müssen die Isolation der
Höhe zu montieren. Wicklungen und der Lager des Motors und die Filter am
– Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Motorwelle parallel zur Motorausgang des Frequenzumrichters entsprechend
angetriebenen bzw. antreibenden Welle ausgerichtet den „Selection rules for VSD applications/Insulation“
ist. (3GZF500930-2) ausgelegt werden (auf Anfrage von
– Spannen Sie den Riemen entsprechend den ABB erhältlich).
Herstellerangaben. In drehzahlveränderbaren Antrieben muss der Motor
(Pn > 30 kW) mit geschirmten symmetrischen Kabeln
WARNUNG und Kabelverschraubungen mit 360° Erdung (auch
Das übermäßige Spannen des Antriebsriemens EMV-Verschraubungen genannt) angeschlossen
führt zur Zerstörung der Lager und kann den werden. Weitere Informationen können Sie dem
Bruch der Welle zur Folge haben! Handbuch von ABB „Grounding and cabling of the drive
system“ (3AFY61201998) entnehmen.
Beachten Sie die maximal zulässigen Riemenkräfte Beim Betrieb an einem Frequenzumrichter muss über
(bzw. Radialkraftbelastungen der Lager), die Sie den die außen am Motorgehäuse vorgesehenen
entsprechenden Produktkatalogen entnehmen können. Erdungsvorrichtungen eine Potentialausgleichs-
verbindung zwischen dem Motorgehäuse und der
getriebenen Maschine hergestellt werden, sofern die
2.4 Anschluss beiden Maschinen nicht auf einem gemeinsamen
Der Klemmenkasten befindet sich für die metallischen Unterbau montiert sind.
Standardausführung auf der Oberseite des Motors und
Hierzu bei Motorbaugrößen > IEC 280 einen Flachleiter
erlaubt den Kabelzugang von beiden Seiten.
mit 0.75 x 70 mm oder mindestens 2 Rundleiter mit
Einige Motoren können als Sonderausführung mit 50 mm2 verwenden. Der Abstand zwischen den
Klemmenkästen geliefert werden, die um 4 x 90° Rundleitern muss dabei mindestens 150 mm betragen.
gedreht werden können. Daneben sind Motoren mit
Diese Verbindung dient nur dem Potentialausgleich. Sie
seitlich angeordnetem Klemmenkasten erhältlich.
hat keine elektrische Sicherheitsfunktion. Wenn Motor
Die Lieferbarkeit dieser Ausführungen ist aus den und Getriebe auf einem gemeinsamen Stahlfundament
Produktkatalogen ersichtlich. montiert sind, wird kein Potentialausgleich benötigt.
Nicht benötigte Öffnungen im Klemmenkasten sind zu
verschließen. Potentialausgleich
Neben den Anschlüssen für die Hauptwicklung und den Platte/Flachleiter Kabel/Rundleiter
Erdungsklemmen kann der Klemmenkasten weitere
Anschlussmöglichkeiten z.B. für Thermistoren,
Stillstandsbeheizung, Bimetallschalter oder PT100
Widerstandsfühler enthalten.
Angtriebene
Maschine
WARNUNG
Auch bei Stillstand des Motors können gefährliche
Die EMV-Vorschriften werden bei Verwendung von für
Spannungen für die Versorgung von
diesen Zweck zugelassenen Kabeln und Anschluss-
Heizelementen oder für eine direkte
teilen erfüllt. (Siehe Anleitung für Frequenzumrichter.)
Wicklungsbeheizung anliegen!
3.1.1 Betriebsbedingungen
Bau- Drehzahl U/min
Die Motoren sind für die Verwendung innerhalb
größe 2 polig 4 polig
industrieller Antriebssysteme bestimmt.
280 3600 2600
Die standardmäßigen Grenzwerte der
315 3600 2300
Umgebungstemperatur betragen -20 ° C ... +40 ° C.
355 3600 2000
Die maximale Aufstellhöhe beträgt standardmäßig
400 3600 1800
1000 m über dem Meeresspiegel (N.N. bzw. MSL).
450 3600 1800
Tabelle 2 3.2 Sicherheitshinweise
Wenn nicht sicher ist, ob ein Motor für Frequenzum- Installation und Betrieb des Motors muss durch
richterbetrieb geeignet ist, wenden Sie sich bitte an qualifiziertes Fachpersonal erfolgen, das die
ABB. einschlägigen sicherheitsrelevanten Anforderungen
kennt.
WARNUNG Die notwendigen Sicherheitseinrichtungen für die
Die maximale Betriebstemperatur des Schmierfetts Verhütung von Unfällen bei Aufstellung und Betrieb
und der Lager darf nicht überschritten werden. müssen in Übereinstimmung mit den jeweils geltenden
Unfallverhütungsbestimmungen vorhanden sein.
2.5 Auswuchten WARNUNG
Der Rotor des Motors ist dynamisch ausgewuchtet. Kleine Motoren, deren Versorgungsspannung
durch temperaturabhängige Schalter direkt
Standardmäßig wurde die Auswuchtung mit halber
geschaltet wird, können gegebenenfalls selbsttätig
Passfeder vorgenommen; das Wellenende trägt ein
anlaufen!
ROTES Klebeband mit der Aufschrift „Mit halber
Passfeder ausgewuchtet - balanced with half key“.
Motoren, die ohne ein die Art des Auswuchtens
3.2.1 WICHTIG!
anzeigendes Etikett geliefert werden, sind ebenfalls mit 1. Nicht auf den Motor treten oder steigen!
halber Passfeder ausgewuchtet. 2. Vorsicht: auch im normalen Betrieb können an der
Oberfläche des Motors hohe Temperaturen
Um Schwingungen zu vermeiden, muß die
auftreten!
Kupplungshälfte oder Riemenscheibe nach dem
3. Einige Anwendungen (z.B. bei Speisung des
Einfräsen der Paßfedernut mit halber Paßfeder
Motors mit Frequenzumrichtern) können spezielle
ausgewuchtet werden.
Hinweise erfordern!
Falls der Rotor mit voller Paßfeder ausgewuchtet 4. Mit den Aufhängeösen darf ausschließlich der
worden ist, trägt das Wellenende ein GELBES Motor angehoben werden. Der Motor darf
Klebeband mit der Aufschrift „Mit voller Paßfeder ausschließlich an den Aufhängeösen angehoben
ausgewuchtet - balanced with full key“. werden.
Bei Auswuchtung ohne Paßfeder ist das Wellenende
mit BLAUEM Klebeband gekennzeichnet (Aufschrift
„Balanced without key / ohne Passfeder
ausgewuchtet“).
DE
Die Montage und Demontage der Motoren darf
ausschließlich von qualifiziertem Personal unter 4.1.1 Allgemeine Kontrolle
Verwendung geeigneter Hilfsmittel und Methoden
ausgeführt werden. Alle Reparaturen müssen unter – Untersuchen Sie den Motor in regelmäßigen
Einhaltung der Norm IEC-60079-19 ausgeführt werden. Abständen
– Halten Sie den Motor sauber und sorgen Sie für
einen freien Kühlluftstrom
3.3.2 Lager – Überprüfen Sie den Zustand der Wellendichtungen
Die Lager sind mit besonderer Sorgfalt zu behandeln. (z.B. V-Ring) und erneuern Sie diese gegebenenfalls
Die Lager dürfen nur mit Hilfe von Ausziehwerkzeugen – Überprüfen Sie den Zustand aller Verbindungen
demontiert und in erwärmtem Zustand oder unter und Verbindungselemente (z.B. Schrauben)
Verwendung von Spezialwerkzeug eingebaut werden. – Überprüfen Sie den Zustand der Lager mit dem
Gehör (ungewöhnliche Geräusche), durch
Der Lageraustausch wird in einer von ABB getrennt Schwingungsmessung, durch Lagertemperatur-
erhältlichen Hinweisschrift ausführlich beschrieben. messung, durch Untersuchung des verbrauchten
Fettes oder durch SPM-Lagerüberwachung
* Im Falle von Zustandsveränderungen ist
3.3.3 Anbau von Kupplungshälften der Motor zu zerlegen, die Bauteile sind zu
und Riemenscheiben untersuchen und ggf. zu erneuern.
Kupplungshälften und Riemenscheiben dürfen nur mit 4.1.2 Schmierung
geeigneter Ausrüstung und mit Hilfe von solchem
Werkzeug montiert werden, das eine Beschädigung der
WARNUNG
Lager ausschließt.
Auf ausreichenden Sicherheitsabstand zu allen
Montieren Sie niemals eine Kupplungshälfte oder drehenden Teilen achten!
Riemenscheibe durch Schläge mit dem Hammer.
Bei der Demontage darf nie ein Hebel gegen das WARNUNG
Motorgehäuse angesetzt werden! Schmierfett kann zu Hautreizungen und
Montagegenauigkeit von Kupplungshälften: Entzündungen der Augen führen. Befolgen Sie
strikt alle Sicherheits-anweisungen des
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sowohl der Freiraum b als auch
Herstellers.
die Differenz zwischen a1 und a2 jeweils kleiner als
0.05 mm sind. Beachten Sie hierzu auch die Angaben 4.1.3 Motoren mit dauergeschmierten
auf dem Bild 3.
Lagern
In der Regel sind Motoren mit dauergeschmierten
Lagern der Typen Z oder 2Z ausgestattet.
Die Bezeichnung der Lager kann den jeweiligen
Produktkatalogen entnommen werden und sie sind, mit
Ausnahme der kleineren Baugrößen, auf das
Leistungschild gestempelt.
Allgemein gilt, dass für Motorgrößen bis 200 eine
ausreichende Schmierung mit einem Schmierintervall
entsprechend L1 (d.h., bei 99 % der Motoren arbeiten
mit diesen Intervallzeiten störungsfrei) bei einer
Umgebungstemperatur von 25 ° C erreicht wird.
Angaben zum Betrieb bei Umgebungstemperaturen
höher als 25 ° C enthalten die jeweiligen
Produktkataloge.
Baugröße Polig Betriebsstunden
56-80 2-8 lebenslänglich
90-112 2-8 40 000
132 2-8 40 000
160 2-8 40 000
180 2-8 40 000
200 2 27 000
200 4 40 000
Tabelle 3
ABB / Low Voltage Motors / Manual 12-2004 21 – DE
Je nach Einsatz- und Lastbedingungen; siehe hierzu B. Automatische Schmierung
den betreffenden Produktekatalog. Bei automatischer Schmierung muss die Fettauslass-
Öffnung oder das Auslassventil, sofern vorhanden,
Bei vertikal aufgestellten Motoren sind die o.g. Werte ständig offen sein.
jeweils zu halbieren.
DE
DE
g/Lager
Kugellager Lager nicht beschädigt werden oder die Temperatur-
Nachschmierintervalle in Betriebsstunden festigkeit des Schmierfetts gewährleistet wird, kann nur
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500 der Schmierstoffhersteller geben.
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
355 M3B* 35 1200 2000 WARNUNG
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000 Von Schmierstoffen mit EP-Zusätzen wird bei
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600
450 M3B* 40 1000 1600
hohen Lagertemperaturen in den Achshöhen
280-450 abgeraten.
Tabelle 6
Rollenlager Bei Umgebungstemperaturen unter -25 ° C oder über
Nachschmierintervalle in Betriebsstunden +55 ° C oder Lagertemperaturen über 110 ° C sind die
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800 Möglichkeiten bezüglich der Verwendung geeigneter
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000
Fette mit ABB abzusprechen.
355 M3B* 35 600 1000 Die folgenden Hochleistungsfette können verwendet
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000
werden
400 M3B* 40 500 800
450 M3B* 40 500 800 – Esso Unirex N2, N3 or S2 (Lithiumkomplex-Basis)
Tabelle 7 – Mobil Mobilith SHC 100 (Lithiumkomplex-Basis)
– Shell Albida EMS 2 (Lithiumkomplex-Basis)
Einflussfaktoren für die Schmierintervalle – SKF LGHQ 3 (Lithiumkomplex-Basis)
Für vertikal montierte Motoren sind die angegebenen – Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41-132
Nachschmierintervalle zu halbieren. (Spezielle Lithiumbasis)
Die Schmierintervalle basieren auf einer Betriebs- – FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (Lithiumkomplex-Basis)
temperatur der Lager von 80 ° C
(Umgebungstemperatur von etwa +25 ° C). Hinweis! Anforderungen an die Eigenschaften erfüllen, wenden
Bei einer höheren Umgebungstemperatur steigt Sie sich zur Klärung an ABB.
entsprechend auch die Lagertemperatur. Bei einem
Anstieg der Lagertemperatur um 15 ° C müssen die HINWEIS!
Werte halbiert werden und können bei einem Abfall der Bei schnellaufenden Motoren, wie z. B. 2-poligen
Lagertemperatur um 15 ° C verdoppelt werden.
Maschinen vom Typ M2BA 355 und 400,
bei denen der Drehzahlfaktor (Dm x n, wobei
WARNUNG Dm = durchschnittlicher Lagerdurchmesser, mm;
Die maximal zulässigen Höchsttemperaturen für n = Drehzahl, min-1) höher ist als 400 000, sind
Schmierfett und Lager dürfen nicht überschritten Hochdrehzahlfette einzusetzen.
werden.
In diesen Fällen können die folgenden Fette oder
andere Fette mit vergleichbaren Eigenschaften
4.1.6 Schmierstoffe verwendet werden:
– FAG L69 (Polyuretan-Basis)
WARNUNG – Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (Polyuretan-Basis)
Verwenden Sie beim gleichen Motor keine – Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (Polyuretan-Basis)
unterschiedlichen Schmierfette. Wenn bei einem Wechsel der Fettsorte Unsicherheit
Nichtkompatible Schmierstoffe können bezüglich der Verträglichkeit besteht, prüfen Sie mit
Lagerschäden verursachen. dem Hersteller, ob die Qualität den oben angegebenen
Schmierfetten entspricht, oder wenden Sie sich zur
Für die Nachschmierung darf nur ein speziell auf die Klärung an ABB.
Schmierung von Kugellagern abgestimmtes Fett mit
den folgenden Eigenschaften verwendet werden: VORSICHT
– Hochwertiges Fett mit Lithiumkomplexseife und Speziell bei hohen Drehzahlen (Drehzahlfaktor
Mineral- oder PAO-Öl > 400000) kann eine Überschmierung zu
– Viskosität des Basisöls 100-160 cST bei 40 ° C Beschädigungen führen.
– Konsistenz NLGI Grad 1.5 bis Grad 3 *)
– Dauergebrauchstemperatur -30 ° C - +120 ° C
*) Für vertikal montierte Motoren oder in heißen
Umgebungen wird ein steiferer NLGI Grad
empfohlen.
4.1.9 Neuwicklung
Eine Erneuerung der Ständerwicklung sollte nur von
qualifizierten Reparaturbetrieben ausgeführt werden.
Bei Brandgas- oder anderen Sondermotoren ist zuvor
Kontakt mit ABB aufzunehmen.
DE
auftretenden Situationen eingegangen werden. Anfragen bezüglich weitergehender Informationen richten Sie bitte
an die nächste ABB-Vertriebsstelle.
Motor-Fehlersuchtabelle
Wartungs- und etwaige Fehlersuchmaßnahmen am Motor dürfen nur von hierfür qualifiziertem Personal und mit
geeigneten Werkzeugen und Hilfsmitteln durchgeführt werden.
Leiterquerschnitt verwenden.
Defekter Käfigläufer Neuen Läufer einbauen.
Netzspannung zu niedrig Spannungsversorgung klären.
Falsche Drehrichtung Falsche Phasenfolge Anschlüsse am Motor bzw. An der Schalttafel
vertauschen.
Motor überhitzt bei Überlast Last reduzieren.
Belüftungsöffnungen sind Belüftungsöffnungen säubern und kontrollieren,
Betrieb unter Last
möglicherweise durch Schmutz ob ein kontinuierlicher Luftstrom den Motor
verstopft und verhindern eine kühlt.
ordnungsgemäße Kühlung des Motors
Eine Motorphase ist möglicherweise Kontrollieren, ob alle Anschlußleitungen richtig
ausgefallen angeschlossen sind.
Erschluß Fehler lokalisieren und beheben.
Unsymmetrische Klemmenspannung Anschlußleitungen, Anschlüsse und
Transformatoren auf Fehler überprüfen.
Motorschwingungen Motor schlecht ausgerichtet Motor nachrichten.
Mangelnde Stabilität des Unterbaus Unterbau verstärken.
Unwucht in Kupplung Kupplung auswuchten.
Unwucht in getriebener Anlage Getriebene Anlage neu auswuchten.
Defekte Lager Lager austauschen.
Lager schlecht ausgerichtet Lager ausrichten.
Auswuchtgewichte verschoben Motor neu auswuchten.
Wuchtung von Läufer und Kupplung Kupplung oder Motor neu auswuchten.
nicht aufeinander abgestimmt
(Halbkeil- bzw. Vollkeilwuchtung)
Mehrphasenmotor läuft einphasig Auf offenen Stromkreis überprüfen.
Axialspiel zu groß Lager nachstellen oder Feder-
Ausgleichsscheibe einlegen.
Geräusche Lüfter reibt an Lüfterkappe Ausreichenden Abstand herstellen.
Lüfter reibt an Isolierung Lüfterweg frei machen.
Lockerer Sitz auf Grundplatte Fußschrauben anziehen.
Betriebsgeräusch zu Luftspalt nicht gleichmäßig Lagerschildbefestigung bzw. Lager überprüfen
laut und entsprechend korrigieren.
Unwucht im Läufer Neu auswuchten.
Lagertemperatur zu Welle verbogen oder beschädigt Welle richten oder austauschen.
Riemenzug zu stark Riemenspannung reduzieren.
hoch, Kugellager
Riemenscheiben zu weit von Riemenscheibe näher am Motorlager anordnen.
Wellenschulter entfernt
Durchmesser der Riemenscheiben zu Größere Riemenscheiben verwenden.
klein
Schlechte Ausrichtung Durch Nachrichten des Antriebs korrigieren.
Unzureichendes Schmierfett Angemessene Qualität des im Lager
vorhandenen Schmierfetts sicherstellen.
FR
Table des matières Page
1. Généralités .......................................................................................................................28
1.1 Déclaration de conformité ........................................................................................28
1.2 Domaine d’application ..............................................................................................28
2. Installation .......................................................................................................................28
2.1 Mise en service (premier démarrage) ......................................................................28
2.1.1 Contrôles de réception.................................................................................28
2.1.2 Mesure de la résistance d’isolement ...........................................................28
2.1.3 Démarrage direct ou démarrage étoile/triangle ...........................................29
2.1.4 Ordre des phases et sens de rotation ..........................................................29
2.2 Manutention ............................................................................................................29
2.2.1 Stockage ......................................................................................................29
2.2.2 Transport .....................................................................................................29
2.2.3 Levage .........................................................................................................29
2.2.4 Masse des machines ...................................................................................30
2.3 Installation ................................................................................................................30
2.3.1 Refroidissement ...........................................................................................30
2.3.2 Fondations ...................................................................................................30
2.3.3 Alignement ...................................................................................................30
2.3.4 Glissières et entraînements à courroie ........................................................30
2.4 Raccordements ........................................................................................................31
2.4.1 Raccordement d’un variateur de vitesse .....................................................31
2.5 Equilibrage ...............................................................................................................32
3. Exploitation ......................................................................................................................32
3.1 Utilisation .................................................................................................................32
3.1.1 Conditions d’exploitation ..............................................................................32
3.2 Sécurité ....................................................................................................................32
3.2.1 Règles à respecter.......................................................................................32
3.3 Montage et démontage ............................................................................................33
3.3.1 Généralités ..................................................................................................33
3.3.2 Roulements..................................................................................................33
3.3.3 Mise en place des demi-accouplements et poulies .....................................33
4. Maintenance ....................................................................................................................33
4.1 Maintenance et lubrification .....................................................................................33
4.1.1 Entretien ......................................................................................................33
4.1.2 Lubrification .................................................................................................33
4.1.3 Machines avec roulements graissés à vie ...................................................33
4.1.4 Moteurs équipés de graisseurs ....................................................................34
4.1.5 Intervalles de lubrification et quantités de lubrifiant .....................................34
4.1.6 Lubrifiants ....................................................................................................35
4.1.7 Moteurs alimentés par convertisseurs de fréquence ...................................36
4.1.8 Pièces de rechange .....................................................................................36
4.1.9 Rebobinage .................................................................................................36
5. Contraintes d’environnement ........................................................................................36
5.1 Niveaux sonores ......................................................................................................36
6. Localisation des défaults ...............................................................................................37
Une notice technique séparée existe pour les autres Moteurs dotés de graisseurs : Lors du premier
types de moteurs, comme par exemple les moteurs de démarrage du moteur, ou après un stockage prolongé
sécurité Ex : « Moteurs basse tension pour du moteur, vous devez injecter une quantité suffisante
atmosphères explosives : Manuel d’installation, de la graisse spécifiée jusqu’à ce que de la graisse
d’exploitation et de maintenance » (réf. Low Voltage neuve s’écoule par le trou d’évacuation.
Motors/Manual for Ex-motors). Pour des détails, cf. section « Lubrification manuelle »
Des consignes supplémentaires sont nécessaires pour page 34.
certains types de machine en raison de spécificités
d’application et/ou de considérations de conception.
2.1.2 Mesure de la résistance
Des consignes supplémentaires sont disponibles pour d’isolement
les moteurs suivants : La résistance d’isolement du moteur doit être mesurée
– moteurs pour table à rouleaux avant sa mise en service et en particulier si les
– moteurs refroidis à l’eau enroulements sont susceptibles d’être humides.
– moteurs de protection IP 23 La résistance, mesurée à 25 °C, doit être supérieure à
– moteurs de désenfumage la valeur de référence, à savoir 10 Mohm (mesurée
– moteurs freins avec un ohmmètre de 500 Vcc.)
– moteurs magnétiques permanents
ATTENTION
Déchargez les enroulements dès la mesure
terminée pour prévenir tout risque de choc
électrique.
FR
pendant 6 à 8 heures. La machine doit toujours être stockée dans un local
Pendant le séchage, vous devez ouvrir la boîte à fermé, à l’abri de l’humidité et de la poussière, et
bornes et retirez les éventuels obturateurs des trous de exempt de vibrations.
purge et autres orifices. Les surfaces usinées non protégées (bouts d’arbre et
Les enroulements imprégnés d’eau de mer doivent brides) doivent être recouvertes d’une protection
normalement être rebobinés. anticorrosion.
Nous préconisons de tourner l’arbre à la main à
2.1.3 Démarrage direct ou intervalles réguliers pour prévenir tout écoulement de
graisse.
démarrage étoile/triangle
Si le moteur est doté de résistances de réchauffage, il
La boîte à bornes des machines monovitesse standard
est préférable de les mettre sous tension.
renferme normalement 6 bornes pour les câbles venant
du bobinage et au moins une borne de terre. Les condensateurs électrolytiques, éventuellement
intégrés aux moteurs monophasés, doivent être
La mise à la terre doit être réalisée conformément à la
« réactivés » après une période de stockage prolongée
réglementation en vigueur avant le branchement de la
(1 à 2 ans).
machine sur l’alimentation réseau.
Pour en savoir plus, contactez ABB.
La tension et le mode de couplage sont gravés sur la
plaque signalétique du moteur.
2.2.2 Transport
Démarrage direct sur le réseau : Pendant le transport ou tout déplacement, le rotor des
Possibilité de couplage Y ou D. moteurs dotés de roulements à rouleaux cylindriques
Ex., 660 VY, 380 VD désigne un couplage Y pour 660 V et/ou à contact oblique doit être immobilisé par un
et un couplage D pour 380 V. dispositif spécial.
Le tableau suivant donne la masse maxi approximative concernées soient bien lisses. La figure ci-après
des machines en exécution de base et en fonction du indique les conditions à remplir.
matériau de la carcasse.
La masse de chaque moteur figure sur sa plaque Remarque : La différence
Règle de niveau maximale entre
signalétique, à l’exception des faibles hauteurs d’axe.
les emplacements des
pattes du moteur ne doit
Aluminium Fonte Acier
pas excéder ± 0,1 mm.
Hauteur Masse Ajouter Masse Masse
d’axe kg pour frein kg kg
56 4.5 - - -
63 6 - - -
71 8 5 13 -
Emplacement des pattes
80 12 8 20 -
90 17 10 30 -
100 25 16 40 - Visserie (éléments de fixation)
112 36 20 50 - Boulonnez les éléments de fixation aux pattes du
132 63 30 90 - moteur et insérez une cale de 1 à 2 mm d’épaisseur
160 110 30 175 - entre chaque élément et les pattes.
180 160 45 250 - Procédez à l’alignement du moteur selon les méthodes
200 220 55 310 - appropriées. Scellez les supports de fixation avec du
225 295 75 400 - béton, vérifiez l’alignement et percez les trous pour les
250 370 75 550 - goupilles de positionnement.
280 405 - 800 600
315 - - 1 700 1 000 Trous de purge
355 - - 2 700 2 200 Vous devez toujours vous assurer que les trous de
400 - - 3 500 3 000 purge ouverts sont dirigés vers le bas.
450 - - 5 000 4 500
Dans les ambiances extrêmement poussiéreuses, tous
Tableau 1 les trous de purge doivent être fermés.
FR
machine entraînée, sauf si les deux machines sont
Certaines machines sont disponibles avec la boîte à montées sur le même support métallique.
bornes montée sur le dessus et réorientable 4 x 90 °, et Pour les moteurs de hauteur d’axe > CEI 280, utilisez
d’autres machines avec la boîte à bornes montée sur le un conducteur plat de 0.75 x 70 mm ou au moins deux
côté. conducteurs ronds de 50 mm2. Les conducteurs ronds
La disponibilité de ces solutions est décrite dans les doivent être placés au moins à 150 mm l’un de l’autre.
catalogues produits. Cette mise à la terre n’assure aucune fonction de
Les entrées de câbles non utilisées doivent être sécurité électrique; elle sert à réaliser l’équipotentialité
obturées. des masses. Lorsque le moteur et le réducteur sont
tous les deux montés sur un même support en acier,
En plus des bornes principales pour les câbles venant cette équipotentialité n’est pas nécessaire.
du bobinage et la borne de terre, la boîte à bornes peut
contenir des raccordements pour des thermistances,
Equipotentiatlité
des résistances de réchauffage, des contacts
bimétalliques ou des sondes à résistance PT 100. Barrette Cables/fils
ATTENTION
Même avec le moteur à l’arrêt, la boîte à bornes
peut être sous tension pour les résistances de
Machine entrainée
réchauffage ou le réchauffage direct des
enroulements.
La conformité CEM sera réalisée en utilisant des câbles
Vous trouverez des diagrammes de connexion des
et une connectique de type homologué (cf. manuels
éléments auxiliaires à l’intérieur du couvercle de la boîte
des convertisseurs de fréquence.)
à bornes ou sur les étiquettes apposées sur le châssis
de la machine. La vitesse de rotation maxi admissible d’un moteur
fonte commandé en vitesse variable (M2BA/M3BP) ne
doit pas dépasser les vitesses maxi admissibles du
ATTENTION
tableau 2 suivant ou la vitesse gravée sur la plaque
La charge du condensateur des moteurs
signalétique. Pour en savoir plus sur la vitesse de
monophasés peut entretenir une tension sur les
rotation maxi admissible pour d’autres tailles et types
bornes d’alimentation, même si le moteur a atteint
de moteurs, contactez ABB. La lubrification des
l’arrêt.
roulements doit se faire selon la procédure décrite plus
2.4.1 Raccordement d’un variateur loin.
ATTENTION
Les petits moteurs dont le courant d’alimentation
est directement établi par des interrupteurs
thermosensibles peuvent démarrer
automatiquement.
FR
Le montage et le démontage des machines doivent être
réalisés par un personnel qualifié en utilisant les outils 4.1.1 Entretien
et les méthodes de travail appropriés. Toutes les
réparations doivent être effectuées conformément à la – Vérifiez l’état de la machine à intervalles réguliers.
norme CEI-60079-19. – La machine doit toujours être propre et correctement
ventilée.
– Vérifiez l’état des joints de l’arbre (ex., joints V-ring),
3.3.2 Roulements au besoin, remplacez-les.
Les roulements doivent faire l’objet d’une attention – Vérifiez l’état des raccordements et du montage, ainsi
particulière. Ils doivent être démontés avec un que les vis de fixation.
extracteur et remontés à chaud ou avec des outils – Vérifiez l’état des roulements : bruit anormal,
spéciaux prévus à cet effet. vibrations, température, aspect de la graisse
souillée (utilisation éventuelle d’un dispositif de
La procédure de remplacement des roulements fait type SPM de surveillance en continu de l’état des
l’objet d’une notice à part disponible auprès d’ABB. roulements et du comportement vibratoire des
machines).
* En cas d’évolution anormale, demontez
3.3.3 Mise en place des demi- la machine, vérifiez l’état des pièces et
accouplements et poulies remplacez les pièces défectueuses.
Les demi-accouplements et les poulies seront montés à
l’aide de dispositifs et outils adaptés pour ne pas 4.1.2 Lubrification
endommager les roulements.
Ne jamais utiliser un marteau pour mettre un demi- ATTENTION
accouplement ou une poulie en place et ne jamais les Attention à toutes les pièces en rotation!
retirer en utilisant un levier prenant appui sur la
carcasse du moteur.
ATTENTION
Précision de montage du demi-accouplement : La graisse est susceptible de provoquer une
Vérifiez que le jeu b est inférieur à 0.05 mm et que irritation de la peau et une inflammation des yeux.
l’écart entre a1 et a2 est également inférieur à 0.05 mm. Respectez les précautions d’utilisation du
Cf. figure 3. fabricant.
FR
Intervalles de lubrification en heures
de fonctionnement
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1 000 1 800
Si la température ambiante est inférieure à -25 °C ou
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1 000 1 800
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1 000 supérieure à +55 °C, ou si la température des
355 M3B* 35 600 1 000 roulements est supérieure à 110 °C, consultez ABB
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1 000 pour le choix du type de graisse approprié.
400 M3B* 40 500 800
450 M3B* 40 500 800 Les graisses hautes performances suivantes peuvent
être utilisées
Tableau 7
– Esso Unirex N2, N3 or S2 (savon lithium complexe)
Facteurs influençant les intervalles de lubrification – Mobil Mobilith SHC 100 (savon lithium complexe)
Les intervalles de lubrification du tableau seront réduits – Shell Albida EMS 2 (savon lithium complexe)
de moitié pour des machines à arbre vertical. – SKF LGHQ 3 (savon lithium complexe)
Les intervalles de lubrification s’entendent pour une – Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41-132
température de fonctionnement des roulements de (savon lithium spécial)
80 °C (température ambiante d’environ +25 °). – FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (savon lithium complexe)
Nota ! : Toute augmentation de la température
Les intervalles de lubrification pour d’autres graisses
ambiante augmente d’autant la température des
roulements. Les intervalles seront réduits de moitié aux propriétés requises, contactez ABB.
pour chaque augmentation de 15 °C de la température
des roulements et doublés pour chaque réduction de NOTA !
15 °C de la température des roulements. Pour les moteurs tournant à grande vitesse et
certains modèles, ex., machines 2 pôles M2BA 355
ATTENTION et 400 pour lesquelles le facteur de vitesse est
Ne jamais dépasser la température maxi de supérieur à 400 000 mm (calcul du facteur de
fonctionnement de la graisse et des roulements. vitesse : Dm x n, où Dm est le diamètre moyen du
roulement en mm et n la vitesse de rotation en
tr/min), vous devez toujours utiliser des graisses
4.1.6 Lubrifiants grande vitesse.
Les types de graisse suivants conviennent :
ATTENTION – FAG L69 (savon polycarbamide)
Ne pas mélanger différents types de graisse. – Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102
Des lubrifiants non miscibles peuvent (savon polycarbamide)
endommager les roulements. – Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (savon polycarbamide)
Si d’autres lubrifiants sont utilisés, vérifiez auprès du
Pour une relubrification, seules les graisses spéciales
fabricant que leurs propriétés correspondent à celles
pour roulements à billes présentant les propriétés
des lubrifiants précités, ou en cas de doute sur la
suivantes doivent être utilisées :
– graisse de qualité supérieure à base de savon lithium miscibilité du lubrifiant, contactez ABB.
complexe et d’huile minérale ou huile synthétique
PAO ATTENTION
– viscosité de l’huile de base entre 100 et 160 cST à Tout graissage excessif peut causer des
40 °C dommages, particulièrement dans le cas de
– consistance (échelle NLGI 1.5 - 3 *) moteurs tournant à grande vitesse (facteur de
– Températures d’utilisation : -30 °C - +120 °C, en vitesse > 400 000).
continu.
*) Pour les moteurs à arbre vertical ou exploité en
ambiance chaude, une consistance NLGI supérieure
est préconisée.
Des graisses aux propriétés énoncées sont proposées
par les principaux fabricants de lubrifiants.
Des additifs sont recommandés, mais une garantie
écrite doit être obtenue auprès du fabricant de
lubrifiants, tout particulièrement pour ce qui concerne
les additifs EP, stipulant que les additifs
n’endommagent pas les roulements ou les propriétés
des lubrifiants à la températures de fonctionnement.
4.1.9 Rebobinage
Le rebobinage doit toujours être réalisé dans un atelier
spécialisé.
Les moteurs de désenfumage et autres moteurs
spéciaux ne doivent pas être rebobinés sans avoir au
préalable contacté ABB.
FR
complémentaire, nous vous invitons à contacter votre correspondant ABB.
ES
Índice Página
1. General .............................................................................................................................40
1.1 Declaración de Conformidad ...................................................................................40
1.2 Validez .....................................................................................................................40
2. Instalación .......................................................................................................................40
2.1 Puesta en servicio (arranque) ..................................................................................40
2.1.1 Comprobación de recepción ........................................................................40
2.1.2 Comprobación de la resistencia de aislamiento ..........................................40
2.1.3 Arranque directo o estrella/triángulo ............................................................41
2.1.4 Terminales y sentido de rotación .................................................................41
2.2 Manipulación ...........................................................................................................41
2.2.1 Almacenamiento ..........................................................................................41
2.2.2 Transporte ...................................................................................................41
2.2.3 Elevación .....................................................................................................41
2.2.4 Pesos de los motores ..................................................................................42
2.3 Instalación ................................................................................................................42
2.3.1 Refrigeración ...............................................................................................42
2.3.2 Anclajes .......................................................................................................42
2.3.3 Alineación ....................................................................................................42
2.3.4 Raíles tensores y accionamiento por correas ..............................................42
2.4 Conexión ..................................................................................................................43
2.4.1 Conexión con accionamiento de velocidad variable ....................................43
2.5 Equilibrado ...............................................................................................................44
3. Funcionamiento ..............................................................................................................44
3.1 Uso ...........................................................................................................................44
3.1.1 Condiciones de operación ...........................................................................44
3.2 Consideraciones de seguridad ................................................................................44
3.2.1 Puntos a tener en cuenta.............................................................................44
3.3 Montaje y desmontaje ..............................................................................................45
3.3.1 General ........................................................................................................45
3.3.2 Rodamientos................................................................................................45
3.3.3 Montaje de acoplamientos y poleas ............................................................45
4. Mantenimiento .................................................................................................................45
4.1 Mantenimiento y lubricación ....................................................................................45
4.1.1 Inspección general.......................................................................................45
4.1.2 Lubricación ..................................................................................................45
4.1.3 Motores con rodamientos lubricados de por vida ........................................45
4.1.4 Motores con sistema de relubricación .........................................................46
4.1.5 Intervalos de lubricación y cantidades .........................................................46
4.1.6 Lubricantes ..................................................................................................47
4.1.7 Accionamientos por convertidor de frecuencia ............................................48
4.1.8 Recambios ...................................................................................................48
4.1.9 Rebobinado .................................................................................................48
5. Requisitos medioambientales .......................................................................................48
5.1 Niveles de ruido .......................................................................................................48
6. Tabla de resolución de problemas del motor ...............................................................49
ATENCIÓN
Los devanados deben descargarse
inmediatamente después de la medición para
evitar riesgos de descarga eléctrica.
ES
horas. El motor debe almacenarse siempre en el interior, en
En caso de existir, deben quitarse los tapones de ambientes secos, sin vibraciones y sin polvo.
drenaje y abrirse las válvulas de cierre antes del Las superficies mecanizadas sin protección (salidas de
secado al horno. eje y bridas) deben ser protegidas con un tratamiento
Normalmente, si la humedad es causada por agua anticorrosivo.
marina, el motor deberá bobinarse de nuevo. Se recomienda hacer girar los ejes periódicamente con
la mano para evitar desplazamientos y/o escapes de
2.1.3 Arranque directo o grasa.
estrella/triángulo Es preferible que las resistencias calefactoras, si el
motor dispone de ellas, estén conectadas.
Normalmente, la caja de bornes en los motores
estándar de una sola velocidad tiene seis terminales y, Las características de los condensadores electrolíticos,
como mínimo, un terminal de conexión a tierra. caso de existir en los motores monofásicos, necesitarán
una “revisión” después de estar almacenados durante
La conexión a tierra debe llevarse a cabo según las
más de 1-2 años. Contacte con ABB para más detalles.
normas nacionales antes de conectar el motor a la
tensión de la red.
2.2.2 Transporte
El voltaje del motor y el tipo de conexión se indican en
la placa de características. Los motores equipados con rodamientos de rodillos y/o
de bolas de contacto angular deben llevar un bloqueo
Arranque directo (D.O.L): durante el transporte.
Pueden utilizarse las conexiones Y o D. Pueden
utilizarse las conexiones Y o D. 2.2.3 Elevación
Ej.: 660 VY, 380 VD indica conexión Y para 660 V y Levantar el motor usando sólo los cáncamos de
conexión D para 380 V. elevación, si no se indica lo contrario en una instrucción
separada de elevación.
Arranque estrella/triángulo (Y/D):
La tensión de la red debe ser igual a la tensión nominal El centro de gravedad de motores con la misma
del motor en conexión D. carcasa puede variar según la potencia, la disposición
de montaje y los elementos auxiliares.
Quite todos los puentes de la placa de bornes.
Comprobar que los cáncamos acoplados a la carcasa
En motores de dos velocidades, motores monofásicos del motor no estén dañados antes de elevarlo. No
y motores especiales, la conexión a la red debe seguir deben utilizarse cáncamos de elevación defectuosos.
las instrucciones indicadas en el interior de la caja de
bornes. Hay que apretar los cáncamos antes de usarlos. Si es
necesario, ajustar la posición del cáncamo con
Si el arranque directo dura más de 10 segundos o el arandelas adecuadas.
arranque Y/D más de 30 segundos, consulte a la
oficina de ventas de ABB o la publicación ‘La Guía del Asegúrese de que utiliza el equipo de elevación
Motor’ (disponible en Internet en www.abb.com/ adecuado y que el tamaño de los ganchos es el
motors&drives). apropiado para los cáncamos de elevación.
Hay que tener mucho cuidado en no dañar el equipo
2.1.4 Terminales y sentido de auxiliar y los cables unidos al motor.
rotación
El sentido de rotación es según las agujas del reloj,
visto desde el lado acople, y la secuencia de fases de
línea L1, L2, L3 está conectada a las terminales, según
se muestra en la figura 1.
Para modificar el sentido de rotación, intercambiar la
conexión de dos cables de línea cualesquiera.
Si el ventilador del motor es de una sola dirección,
asegúrese de que el sentido de rotación es el mismo
que el de la flecha dibujada en el motor.
ES
de 150 mm.
Algunos motores están disponibles con una caja de Esta disposición no tiene una función de seguridad
bornes en la parte superior orientable 4 x 90°, y algunos eléctrica; el objetivo es igualar los potenciales. Cuando
con la caja de bornes montada al lado. se montan el motor y el reductor en una misma
La disponibilidad de estas opciones se describe en el bancada de acero común, no es necesario realizar
catálogo de producto. conexiones equipotenciales.
ATENCIÓN
Los motores pequeños, conectados directamente
a la fuente de tensión a través de relés térmicos,
pueden arrancar automáticamente.
ES
El montaje y desmontaje de los motores debe ser
llevado a cabo por personas cualificadas y con los 4.1.1 Inspección general
utensilios y métodos de trabajo adecuados. Todas las
reparaciones se deben llevar a cabo de acuerdo con la – Inspeccione el motor a intervalos regulares.
norma IEC-60079-19. – Mantenga el motor limpio y asegúrese de que tiene
una buena ventilación.
– Compruebe el estado de los retenes (por ejemplo,
3.3.2 Rodamientos obturador V) y cámbielos si es necesario.
Siempre hay que prestar especial atención a los – Compruebe el estado de las conexiones y de los
rodamientos. Hay que quitarlos con extractores y pernos de montaje.
montarlos por calentamiento, utilizando herramientas – Compruebe el estado de los rodamientos,
especiales para tal propósito. escuchando si hay ruidos extraños, midiendo la
vibración, la temperatura del rodamiento,
La forma de cambiar los rodamientos se describe con inspeccionando la grasa utilizada o con
detalle en un folleto de instrucciones aparte, disponible monitorización SPM del rodamiento.
en ABB. * En caso de ocurrir cambios en las
condiciones del motor, desmóntelo,
verifique el estado de las piezas y
3.3.3 Montaje de acoplamientos y cámbielas si es necesario.
poleas
4.1.2 Lubricación
Los acoplamientos y las poleas deben montarse
utilizando equipos y herramientas adecuados que no ATENCIÓN
dañen los rodamientos. ¡Cuidado con todas las partes giratorias!
Nunca se debe montar un acoplamiento o una polea
golpeándola con un martillo. Tampoco debe quitarse ATENCIÓN
con una palanca haciendo presión sobre el cuerpo del La grasa puede causar irritación de la piel e
motor. inflamación de los ojos. Siga todas las
Exactitud del montaje de una mitad de acoplamiento: indicaciones de seguridad especificadas por el
fabricante.
compruebe que la distancia b sea inferior a 0,05 mm y
que la diferencia de a1 a a2 también sea inferior a 4.1.3 Motores con rodamientos
0,05 mm. Véase figura 3.
lubricados de por vida
Los rodamientos son normalmente lubricados de por
vida de los tipos Z ó 2Z.
El tipo de rodamientos se especifica en los catálogos
respectivos de cada producto y en la placa de
características de todos nuestros motores, excepto los
tamaños más pequeños.
Como guía, se puede conseguir una lubricación
adecuada en tamaños hasta 200 para el siguiente
funcionamiento, según L1 (es decir, que el 99% de los
motores superan este intervalo) a una temperatura
ambiente de 25 °C. Para funcionamiento a temperatura
ambiente mayor de 25 °C consulte el correspondiente
catálogo de producto.
Tamaño carcasa Polos Horas de servicio
56-80 2-8 de por vida
90-112 2-8 40 000
132 2-8 40 000
160 2-8 40 000
180 2-8 40 000
200 2 27 000
200 4 40 000
Tabla 3
ES
g/rodamiento
Rodamientos de bolas especialmente en lo que se refiere a aditivos EP, de
Intervalos de lubricación en horas de servicio que los aditivos no dañan los rodamientos o altera las
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500 propiedades de los lubricantes a la temperatura de
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 2000 3500
trabajo.
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000
355 M3B* 35 1200 2000
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 1200 2000 ATENCIÓN
400 M3B* 40 1000 1600
No se recomiendan lubricantes que contienen
450 M3B* 40 1000 1600
aditivos EP para temperaturas altas del
Tabla 6 rodamiento en tamaños de carcasa 280-450.
Rodamientos de rodillos
Intervalos de lubricación en horas de servicio Si la temperatura ambiente es inferior a -25 °C o
280 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
315 M2B*, M2C*, M3B* 35 1000 1800
superior a +55 °C, o la temperatura del rodamiento
355 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000 supera los 110 °C, consulte con ABB acerca de la grasa
355 M3B* 35 600 1000 apropiada.
400 M2B*, M2C* 45 600 1000
400 M3B* 40 500 800 Pueden utilizarse los siguientes tipos (o similares) de
450 M3B* 40 500 800 grasa de alto rendimiento:
Tabla 7 – Esso Unirex N2, N3 o S2 (base compleja de litio)
– Mobil Mobilith SHC 100 (base compleja de litio)
Factores que inciden en los intervalos de – Shell Albida EMS 2 (base compleja de litio)
lubricación – SKF LGHQ 3 (base compleja de litio)
Los intervalos de lubricación para motores en posición – Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41-132
vertical son la mitad de los valores anteriores. (base de litio especial)
Los valores de la tabla se basan en una temperatura de – FAG Arcanol TEMP110 (base compleja de litio)
de operación de rodamientos de 80 °C (temperatura Si se usa otra grasa con las propiedades requeridas los
ambiente de unos +25 °C). ¡Nota! Un aumento de la
intervalos de lubricación, contacten con ABB.
temperatura ambiente incrementa la temperatura de los
rodamientos proporcionalmente. Los valores deben
reducirse a la mitad en caso de un aumento de 15 °C ¡NOTA!
en la temperatura de los rodamientos y pueden Utilice siempre grasa de alta velocidad para motores
doblarse en caso de una reducción de 15 °C en la de alta velocidad y para algún otro tipo, por ejemplo,
temperatura de los rodamientos. motores de 2 polos M2BA 355 y 400, en los que el
factor de velocidad es superior a 400 000 (calculado
ATENCIÓN como Dm x n, dónde Dm = diámetro medio del
No debe sobrepasarse la temperatura máxima de rodamiento, mm; n = velocidad de rotación, r/min).
funcionamiento de la grasa y de los rodamientos. Se puede utilizar la siguientes grasas:
– FAG L69 (base poliurea)
4.1.6 Lubricantes – Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (base poliurea)
– Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (base poliurea)
ATENCIÓN Si se utilizan otros lubricantes, pregunte al fabricante si
No mezcle distintos tipos de grasa. las calidades corresponden con las de los lubricantes
Lubricantes incompatibles pueden causar daños antes mencionados, o contacte con ABB si no está
en los rodamientos. seguro de la compatibilidad del lubricante.
ATENCIÓN
Al engrasar, utilizar sólo grasa especial para
Especialmente para velocidades de rotación
rodamientos de bolas, que presente las siguientes
elevadas (factor de velocidad > 400.000),
propiedades:
– grasa de buena calidad con jabón complejo de litio y un engrase excesivo puede causar daños.
aceite mineral o aceite sintético (PAO).
– viscosidad del aceite base 100-160 cST a 40 °C
– consistencia NLGI grado 1.5 - 3 *)
– gama de temperatura -30 °C - +120 °C, de forma
continua.
*) Para motores montados en vertical o en condiciones
altas de temperatura se recomienda un mayor grado
NLGI
menor velocidad con altas cargas requerirá intervalos 5.1 Niveles de ruido
de lubricación menores. En estos casos consulte a La mayoría de nuestros motores tienen un nivel de
ABB. presión sonora que no sobrepasa los 82 dB(A)
Normalmente al duplicar la velocidad se requerirá una referidos a una alimentación sinusoidal de 50 Hz, con
reducción de los intervalos de lubricación de un 40% de tolerancia de ± 3 dB(A).
los valores indicados en la tabla anterior. Los catálogos de producto correspondientes muestran
los valores para los motores específicos.
ATENCIÓN Para niveles de presión sonora con alimentación
No se debe superar la velocidad constructiva sinusoidal a 60 Hz o no sinusoidal, contacten con ABB.
máxima del motor (consulte la Tabla 2).
Los niveles de presión sonora de todas las máquinas
Se debe comprobar que los rodamientos sean dotadas de sistemas de refrigeración separados y para
adecuados para funcionamiento a alta velocidad. las series M2F*/M3F*, M2L*/M3L*, M2R*/M3R*,
M2BJ/M3BJ y M2LJ/M3LJ se indican en manuales
separados.
4.1.8 Recambios
Al solicitar recambios, debe especificarse toda la
designación del tipo y el código del producto, según se
indica en la placa de características.
Si el motor presenta un número de fabricación de serie,
éste debe indicarse también.
Para obtener más información, visite nuestra página
web: www.abb.com/partsonline.
4.1.9 Rebobinado
El rebobinado debe llevarse siempre a cabo en talleres
cualificados.
Los motores para ventiladores contra incendios y otros
motores especiales no deben rebobinarse sin contactar
primero con ABB.
ES
de necesitar información adicional, rogamos se pongan en contacto con la oficina de ventas de ABB más próxima.
calienta mientras La carcasa o las rejillas de Limpiar los agujeros de la rejilla y verificar
funciona con baja carga ventilación están llenas de suciedad que hay una corriente de aire continua en el
y obstaculizan una adecuada motor.
ventilación del motor
Posiblemente el motor tiene una Verificar que todos los cables estén bien
fase abierta conectados.
Bobinado a masa Localizar y reparar.
Tensión eléctrica en terminales Comprobar si hay cables, conexiones y
desequilibrada transformadores defectuosos.
El motor vibra Motor mal alineado Realinear.
Soporte inestable Reforzar la base.
Acoplamiento desequilibrado Equilibrar acoplamiento.
Equipo accionado desequilibrado Reequilibrar el equipo accionado.
Rodamientos defectuosos Sustituir los rodamientos.
Rodamientos desalineados Alinear adecuadamente.
Cambio de posición de los pesos de Reequilibrar el motor.
equilibrado
Contradicción entre el equilibrado Reequilibrar el acoplamiento o el motor.
del rotor y el del acoplamiento
(media chaveta – chaveta entera)
Motor trifásico funcionando como Buscar y reparar la falta de fase.
monofásico
Juego axial excesivo Ajustar el rodamiento o añadir galga.
Chirridos El ventilador roza el escudo Eliminar interferencia.
El ventilador golpea el protector Verificar ventilador.
Placa base suelta Ajustar tornillos de sujeción.
Funcionamiento ruidoso Entrehierro no uniforme Verificar y corregir montaje escudos o
rodamiento.
Desequilibrio del rotor Reequilibrado.
Calentamiento excesivo Eje doblado o torcido Enderezar o sustituir eje.
Rodamientos Tensión excesiva de la correa Disminuir la tensión de la correa.
Las poleas están demasiado lejos Acercar la polea al rodamiento del motor.
del resalte del eje
Diámetro de polea demasiado Utilizar poleas más grandes.
pequeño
Mala alineación Corregir realineando el motor con la máquina
accionada.
Calentamiento excesivo Grasa insuficiente Mantener la calidad adecuada de la grasa en
rodamientos de bolas el rodamiento.
Deterioro de la grasa o lubricante Quitar la grasa vieja, limpiar cuidadosamente
contaminado los rodamientos con queroseno y sustituirla
por grasa nueva.
Exceso de lubricante Reducir la cantidad de grasa. No llenar el
rodamiento más de la mitad de su capacidad.
Rodamiento sobrecargado Comprobar alineación, magnitud y dirección
empuje de la carga.
Bola rota o caminos de rodadura Sustituir rodamiento, limpiando primero el
dañados alojamiento cuidadosamente.
IT
Sommario Pagina
AVVERTENZA:
Gli avvolgimenti devono essere scaricati
immediatamente dopo la misura per evitare rischi
di shock elettrici.
IT
La temperatura del forno deve essere di 90°C per coperto, asciutto, privo di vibrazioni e di polvere.
12-16 ore e successivamente di 105°C per 6-8 ore. Le superfici non protette del motore (estremità d’albero
I tappi dei fori di scarico condensa devono essere e flange) devono essere protette con trattamento
rimossi e le valvole chiuse se montate devono essere anticorrosivo.
aperte durante l’essicamento. Si raccomanda di ruotare a mano periodicamente
Avvolgimenti che siano rimasti immersi in acqua di l’albero per prevenire migrazioni di lubrificante.
mare normalmente devono essere rifatti. Le scaldiglie anticondensa, se esistenti, devono essere
preferibilmente tenute sotto tensione.
2.1.3 Avviamento diretto oppure Le caratteristiche di condensatori elettrolitici, se montati
stella/triangolo su motori monofase, devono essere ripristinate dopo
La scatola morsetti su motori standard a velocità periodi di immagazzinaggio superiosi a 1-2 anni. Per
singola contiene normalmente 6 terminali e almeno un maggiori dettagli contattare ABB Motors.
morsetto di terra.
2.2.2 Trasporto
La messa a terra deve essere effettuata in accordo alle
legislazioni locali prima del collegamento del motore Motori equipaggiati con cuscinetti a rulli cilindrici e/o
alla rete. con contatto angolare devono essere bloccati durante il
trasporto.
La tensione ed il collegamento sono stampigliati sulla
targhetta del motore.
2.2.3 Sollevamento
Avviamento diretto da rete (DOL) Per sollevare il motore utilizzare esclusivamente i
Nell’avviamento diretto il motore può essere utilizzato golfari di sollevamento, se non specificato diversamente
sia con collegamento a stella che a triangolo nelle istruzioni separate di sollevamento.
(naturalmente con tensioni diverse).
Il centro di gravità dei motori con la stessa altezza
Per esempio 660 VY, 380 VD indica che il motore può d’asse può variare in funzione della diversa potenza,
essere collegato a stella per 660 V ed a triangolo per della forma costruttiva e delle apparecchiature
380 V. ausiliarie.
IT
Alcuni motori possono essere forniti, in alternativa, con
la scatola morsetti montata sulla sommita del motore Equipotenziamento
orientabile di 90 in 90 gradi oppure con la scatola
Conduttore platto Cavi
morsetti montata lateralmente.
La disponibilitá di queste versioni alternative è illustrata
sul catalogo di prodotto.
Gli ingressi cavi non utilizzati devono essere chiusi. Macchina
accoppiata
Oltre ai terminali dell’avvolgimento e di terra, la scatola
morsetti può contenere le connessioni per termistori, Per essere conformi ai requisiti delle EMC, è
scaldiglie, bimetalli o termoresistenze PT100. necessario usare cavi e collegamenti conformi allo
scopo (vedere le istruzioni per i convertitori di
AVVERTENZA:
frequenza).
Durante le fermate, all’interno della scatola
morsetti può essere presente tensione utilizzata La velocità di rotazione massima dei motori in ghisa
per alimentare le scaldiglie o direttamente utilizzati negli azionamenti a velocità variabile (M2BA/
l’avvolgimento per tenerlo in temperatura. M3BP) non deve superare la velocità massima riportata
nella tabella 2 di seguito o la velocità nominale riportata
Gli schemi di collegamento per i circuiti ausiliari si sulla targhetta.
trovano all’interno del coperchio della scatola morsetti o
su etichette poste sulla carcassa della macchina. Grandezza Velocita’ r/min
2 poli 4 poli
AVVERTENZA: 280 3600 2600
Il condensatore in motori monofase può rimanere 315 3600 2300
caricato tenendo in tensione i morsetti, anche
355 3600 2000
quando il motore è ormai fermo.
400 3600 1800
2.4.1 Applicazioni con convertitori di 450 3600 1800
frequenza Tabella 2
I convertitori di frequenza causano un affaticamento per Se esiste un’ incertezza a riguardo della corretta
la presenza di picchi di alta tensione rispetto alla applicazione del motore per applicazione con
normale onda sinusoidale applicata ai capi convertitore di frequenza prego contattare ABB.
dell’avvolgimento del motore, e possono inoltre essere
causa della presenza di tensione indotta sull’albero
AVVERTENZA:
dall’alta frequenza di lavoro e correnti nei cuscinetti. Per
La massima temperatura di lavoro del grasso e dei
tale ragione l’avvolgimento e l’isolamento dei cuscinetti
cuscinetti non deve essere superata.
del motore come il filtro di uscita del convertitore
devono essere dimensionati in accordo con “Selection
rules for VSD application/insulation” (3GZF500930-2), 2.5 Bilanciatura
disponibili a richiesta presso ABB. Il rotore del motore è bilanciato dinamicamente.
Nelle applicazioni con convertitore di frequenza il Nei motori standard la bilanciatura è effettuata con
motore (Pn > 30 kW) deve essere cablato utilizzando mezza chiavetta e sull’albero viene applicato un nastro
cavi simmetrici schermati e passacavo forniti di ghiera ROSSO con la dicitura “bilanciato con mezza chiavetta”
metallica a 360° (chiamati anche passacavi EMC). (Balanced with half key). Nel caso di motori consegnati
Ulteriori informazioni possono essere reperite sul senza il nastro che definisce il tipo di bilanciatura, tali
manuale ABB “grounding and cabling of the drive motori sono stati bilanciati con mezza chiavetta.
system” (3AFY61201998).
Per evitare vibrazioni, il giunto o la puleggia devono
La vite di messa a terra esterna della carcassa motore essere bilanciati con mezza chiavetta dopo aver
deve essere utilizzata per equilibrare la differenza di ricavato la sede per la stessa.
potenziale tra la carcassa del motore e della macchina
accoppiata, salvo che le due macchine non siano In caso di bilanciatura con chiavetta intera, sull’albero
montate sulla stessa base metallica. verrà applicato un nastro GIALLO con la dicitura
“bilanciato con chiavetta intera” (Balanced with full key).
Per le grandezze maggiori alla IEC 280, utilizzare un
cavo piatto da 0.75 x 70 mm o almeno due cavi circolari In caso di bilanciatura senza chiavetta, sull’albero
di 50 mm2. La distanza tra i cavi circolari dovrà essere verrà applicato un nastro BLU con la dicitura
di almeno 150 mm l’uno dall’altro. “Bilanciato senza chiavetta” (Balanced without key).
Il motore deve essere installato ed utilizzato da La sostituzione dei cuscinetti è descritta in dettaglio su
personale qualificato che sia a conoscenza dei requisiti istruzioni separate da richiedere ad ABB Motors.
di sicurezza.
Le attrezzature antinfortunistiche necessarie alla
3.3.3 Montaggio di semigiunti e
prevenzione di incidenti durante il montaggio e pulegge
funzionamento del motore sull’impianto devono essere Semigiunti e pulegge devono essere montati solo con
in accordo alle regole antinfortunistiche vigenti nel l’utilizzo di strumenti adatti, che non danneggino i
paese. cuscinetti.
Non usare mai un martello per montare un semigiunto o
AVVERTENZA:
un cuscinetto e non usare mai una leva infulcrata contro
Piccoli motori collegati direttamente alla rete
il corpo del motore per rimuoverli.
tramite interruttori termici possono avviarsi
automaticamente. Per montare accuratamente il semigiunto:
controllare che il gioco b sia inferiore a 0.05 mm e che
3.2.1 Osservazioni: la differenza tra a1 e a2 sia anch’essa inferiore a
1. Il motore non deve essere utilizzato per 0.05 mm. Vedere figura 3.
funzionamento ad impulsi.
2. La temperatura della carcassa del motore può
risultare estremamente calda al contatto della mano
durante il normale funzionamento.
3. Alcune applicazioni speciali richiedono istruzioni
speciali (ad esempio alimentazione a mezzo inverter).
4. I golfari di sollevamento dovranno essere utilizzati per
sollevare il solo motore. I golfari non possono essere
uilizzati per il sollevamento se il motore e’ collegato
con un altro equipaggiamento.
IT
rulli è notevolmente più breve. Per un funzionamento
continuo si consiglia di utilizzare degli ingrassatori.
4.1.1 Ispezione generale
– Ispezionare il motore a intervalli regolari 4.1.4 Motori forniti con ingrassatori
– Mantenere il motore pulito e assicurare una buona
ventilazione. Targhetta informazioni sulla lubrificazione e
– Controllare le condizioni di anelli di tenuta sull’albero indicazioni generali
(es. V-ring) e sostituirli se necessario. Se il motore è provvisto di targhetta riportante le
– Controllare le condizioni delle connessioni e dei istruzioni per la lubrificazione, seguire i valori indicati,
bulloni di fissaggio e fondazione. altrimenti attenersi ai valori dati.
– Controllare le condizioni dei cuscinetti prestando
attenzione ad eventuali rumori anomali, alle Sdulla targhetta gli intervalli di ingrassaggio rispetto al
vibrazioni, alla temperatura, analizzando il grasso tipo di montaggio, temperatura ambiente e velocita’ di
consumato ed effettuando monitoraggi con rilevatori rotazione possono essere riportati in alcuni casi.
SPM dove esistenti. Dopo il primo avviamento o dopo la lubrificazione di un
* Quando si rilevino condizioni anomale, cuscinetto, è possibile che si manifesti
smontare il motore, controllarne le parti ed temporaneamente un aumento di temperatura, per circa
effettuare le sostituzioni necessarie.
10-20 ore. Uno degli obiettivi di ABB è di garantire
l’affidabilità dei cuscinetti attraverso corretti intervalli di
4.1.2 Lubrificazione lubrificazione. Questo è il motivo per cui ABB segue le
regole del principio L1.
AVVERTENZA: A. Lubrificazione manuale
Prestare attenzione alle parti in movimento
Ingrassaggio mentre il motore e’ in servizio
– Togliere il tappo di scarico grasso, se presente o
AVVERTENZA: aprire le valvole di ingrassaggio se presenti.
Il grasso puo’ causare irritazioni della pelle e – Assicurarsi che il canale di ingrassaggio sia aperto.
infiammazioni agli occhi. Seguire tutte le – Premere la giusta quantita’ di grasso nel cuscinetto.
necessarie precauzioni indicate dal fabbricante. – Fare funzionare il motore per 1-2 ore per assicurarsi
che tutto il grasso in eccesso venga spinto fuori dai
4.1.3 Motori con cuscinetti ad cuscinetti. Rimettere il tappo di scarico grasso e
ingrassaggio permanente chiudere le valvole di ingrassaggio, se esistenti.
I cuscinetti sono normalmente forniti come cuscinetti ad Ingrassaggio quando il motore non e’ servizio
ingrassaggio permanente dei tipi “Z” o “2Z”. Procedere alla rilubrificazione dei motori durante il
I tipi di cuscinetti montati sono specificati nel rispettivi funzionamento. Se non è possibile, la lubrificazione può
cataloghi di prodotto esulla targhetta motore eccetto per essere eseguita a motore fermo.
le piccole taglie. – In questo caso usare solo la metà della quantità di
grasso richiesto, poi mettere in funzione il motore per
Si elencano gli intervalli indicativi per una adeguata qualche minuto alla velocità nominale.
lubrificazione per taglie maggiori di 200 in accordo a L1 – Dopo aver fermato il motore, immettere la quantità
(ciò significa che il 99 % dei cuscinetti avrà una rimanente di grasso nel cuscinetto.
lubrificazione più che adeguata) riferiti ad una – Dopo 1-2 ore di funzionamento rimettere il tappo di
temperatura ambiente di 25°C. Vedere il rispettivo scarico grasso o chiudere le valvole di ingrassaggio
catalogo di prodotto. (se presenti).
Grandezza Poli Ore B. Lubrificazione automatica
56-80 2-8 a vita In caso di lubrificazione automatica rimuovere
90-112 2-8 40 000 permanentemente il tappo di scarico grasso o aprire le
132 2-8 40 000 valvole di ingrassaggio se montate.
160 2-8 40 000
180 2-8 40 000 Alcuni motori possono essere equipaggiati con un
200 2 27 000 raccoglitore per il grasso usato. Seguire le speciali
200 4 40 000 istruzioni per questo dispositivo.
Noi raccomandiamo di utilizzare soltanto sistemi
Tabella 3 elettromeccanici. Contattare ABB.
IT
Se sulla targhetta compare un numero di matricola del
– Esso Unirex N2, N3 or S2 motore è necessario comunicare anche quest’ultimo.
(base con composto al litio)
– Mobil Mobilith SHC 100 Per ulteriori informazioni, visitare il sito www.abb.com/
(base con composto al litio) partsonline.
– Shell Albida EMS 2 (base con composto al litio)
– SKF LGHQ 3 (base con composto al litio) 4.1.9 Riavvolgimento
– Klüber Klüberplex BEM 41-132 Il riavvolgimento dovrà sempre essere eseguito da
(base di poliurea di calcio) officine qualificate.
– FAG Arcanol TEMP110
(base con composto al litio) Motori speciali e motori per estrazione fumi potranno
essere riavvolti solo previo contatto con ABB Motori.
Intervalli di lubrificazione per altri tipi di grasso che
rispettano le specifiche e proprieta’ richieste, contattare
ABB.
5. Requisiti ambientali
NOTA!
Utilizzare sempre lubrificante per alte velocità se si 5.1 Livello di rumorosità
usano motori ad alta velocità ed alcuni modelli tipo La maggior parte dei nostri motori hanno un livello di
M2BA 355 e 400 2-poli, quando il fattore di velocità è rumorosità (pressione sonora) inferiore ai 82 dB(A)
superiore a 400 000 (calcolato come Dm x n dove riferita alla condizione di alimentazione sinusoidale,
Dm = diametro medio del cuscinetto, mm; tolleranza ± 3dB(A).
n = velocità di rotazione, r/min).
I valori esatti per ogni tipo di motore possono essere
Utilizzare il seguente, o similare, tipo di lubrificante: rilevati dai relativi cataloghi di prodotto.
– FAG L69 (base di poliurea)
– Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (base di poliurea) Con alimentazione sinusoidale e frequenza 60 Hz e per
– Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (base di poliurea) livelli di rumorosità con alimentazione non sinusoidale,
consultare ABB Motors.
Se si cambia la marca del lubrificante controllare la
compatibilita’ in accordo con il produttore del I livelli di rumorosità per tutte le macchine con sistemi di
lubrificante. Se la compatibilità non è certa, raffreddamento separati e per le serie M2F*/M3F*,
contattare ABB. M2L*/M3L*, M2R*/M3R*, M2BJ/M3BJ e M2LJ/M3LJ
sono riportati nei relativi manuali.
AVVERTENZA:
L’eccesso di grasso può causare danni soprattutto
a velocità di rotazione elevate (fattore di velocità
> 400000).
AVVERTENZA:
Non superare la temperatura massima consentita
per il motore (vedere tabella 2).
IT
Macchina accoppiata sbilanciata Bilanciare la macchina accoppiata.
Cuscinetti difettosi Sostituire i cuscinetti.
Pesi di bilanciatura allentati Bilanciare il rotore.
Motore bilanciato diversamente dal Bilanciare il giunto o il motore.
giunto (mezza chiavetta – chiavetta
intera)
Motore trifase che funzione a fase Controllare le fasi.
singola
Gioco eccessivo Aggiustare il cuscinetto o mettere uno spessore.
Rumore anomalo La ventola raschia il copriventola Eliminare il contatto.
Basetta allentata Stringere le viti relative.
Rumorosità durante il Traferro non uniforme Controllare e correggere l’allineamento dei
funzionamento cuscinetti.
Rotore non bilanciato Bilanciarlo.
Cuscinetti troppo caldi Albero piegato o incrinato Raddrizzare o sostituire l’albero.
Trazione eccessiva delle cinghie Diminuire la tensione delle cinghie.
Pulegge troppo lontane dalla battuta Avvicinare la puleggia alla battuta del motore.
dell’albero
Diametro puleggia troppo piccolo Usare pulegge più grandi.
Allineamento non corretto Correggere l’allineamento del motore e della
macchina accoppiata.
Grasso insufficiente Mantere la giusta quantità di lubrificante nei
cuscinetti.
Lubrificante deteriorato o Rimuovere il grasso vecchio, lavare i cuscinetti
contaminato accuratamente con kerosene e reingrassare con
del nuovo lubrificante.
SE
Innehåll Sida
1. Allmänt .............................................................................................................................64
1.1 EU-deklaration .........................................................................................................64
1.2 Giltighet ....................................................................................................................64
2. Installation .......................................................................................................................64
2.1 Igångkörning ............................................................................................................64
2.1.1 Ankomstkontroll ...........................................................................................64
2.1.2 Kontroll av isolationsresistansen .................................................................64
2.1.3 Direktstart eller Y/D start ..............................................................................65
2.1.4 Uttag och rotationsriktning ...........................................................................65
2.2 Hantering ................................................................................................................65
2.2.1 Förvaring......................................................................................................65
2.2.2 Transport .....................................................................................................65
2.2.3 Lyftning ........................................................................................................65
2.2.4 Vikter............................................................................................................66
2.3 Uppställning .............................................................................................................66
2.3.1 Kylning .........................................................................................................66
2.3.2 Fundament...................................................................................................66
2.3.3 Uppriktning...................................................................................................66
2.3.4 Spännlinjaler och remdrift ............................................................................66
2.4 Anslutning ................................................................................................................67
2.4.1 Anslutning för frekvensomriktardrift .............................................................67
2.5 Balansering ..............................................................................................................67
3. Drift ...................................................................................................................................68
3.1 Användning ..............................................................................................................68
3.1.1 Driftmiljö .......................................................................................................68
3.2 Säkerhetsaspekter ...................................................................................................68
3.2.1 Var vänlig observera ....................................................................................68
3.3 Montering och demontering .....................................................................................68
3.3.1 Allmänt .........................................................................................................68
3.3.2 Lager............................................................................................................68
3.3.3 Montering av kopplingshalvor och remskivor ...............................................68
4. Underhåll ..........................................................................................................................69
4.1 Underhåll och smörjning ..........................................................................................69
4.1.1 Allmänt underhåll .........................................................................................69
4.1.2 Smörjning.....................................................................................................69
4.1.3 Motorer med permanentsmorda lager .........................................................69
4.1.4 Motorer med smörjnipplar ............................................................................69
4.1.5 Smörjintervall i drifttimmar och fettmängder ................................................70
4.1.6 Lagerfett.......................................................................................................70
4.1.7 Frekvensomriktardrift ...................................................................................71
4.1.8 Reservdelar .................................................................................................71
4.1.9 Omlindning...................................................................................................71
5. Miljökrav ...........................................................................................................................71
5.1 Ljudnivå ....................................................................................................................71
6. Felsökning .......................................................................................................................72
SE
omlindas. All lagring av motorer skall göras inomhus under torra,
vibrations- och dammfria förhållanden.
2.1.3 Direktstart eller Y/D start Oskyddade bearbetade ytor (axeltappar och flänsar)
skall behandlas med rostskyddsmedel.
Uttagslådan till en standard enhastighetsmotor
innehåller normalt 6 lindningsuttag och minst ett Axeln bör roteras med jämna mellanrum för att förhindra
jorduttag. att fettfilmen i lagren trängs igenom.
Motorn skall anslutas till jord enligt gällande Anslut gärna stilleståndsuppvärmningen om sådan finns
bestämmelser innan den ansluts till nätet. installerad i motorn.
Spänning och koppling framgår av märkskylten. Karaktäristiken för elektrolytkondensatorer i
enfasmotorer, om sådana används, erfordrar formering
Direktstart efter lagring i 1 - 2 år.
Y eller D koppling kan nyttjas.
Kontakta ABB:s försäljningskontor för detaljanvisningar.
T.ex 660 VY, 380 VD anger Y-koppling för 660 V och
D-koppling för 380 V. 2.2.2 Transport
Y/D-start Motorer utrustade med rullager och/eller vinkelkontakt-
Nätspänningen måste vara lika med motorns lager skall vara försedda med transportlåsning av rotorn
märkspänning i D-koppling. under transport.
Om en direktstart (DOL) varar längre än 10 sek eller en Motorns tyngdpunkt kan, trots samma storlek, variera
Y/D-start längre än 30 sek, konsultera ABB:s beroende på uteffekt, monteringssätt och
försäljningskontor eller se publikation ”The Motor sidoutrustning.
Guide” (finns även tillgånglig på internet på Kontrollera att öglebultarna eller lyftöglorna på
www.abb.com/motors&drives). motorstativet är oskadade före lyftning. Skadade
lyftöglor får inte användas.
2.1.4 Uttag och rotationsriktning Lyftöglorna måste vara väl åtdragna före lyftning. Vid
Rotationsriktningen är medurs sett mot axeländan på behov kan lyftöglornas lägen justeras med hjälp av
drivsidan om nätfaserna L1, L2 och L3 ligger anslutna brickor.
till uttagen som visas i figur 1. Kontrollera att korrekt lyftutrustning används och att
För att ändra rotationsriktning, växla plats på två av krokarnas storlek är anpassad till lyftöglorna.
nätanslutningskablarna. Var noga med att inte skada hjälputrustning och kablar
Om motorn har en riktningsberoende fläkt skall som är anslutna till motorn.
rotationsriktningen överensstämma med pilen på
motorn.
Följande tabell visar uppskattade maximala vikter för respektive fotyta. Kraven anges i bilden nedan.
motorer i standardutförande som en funktion av
materialet i statorhuset.
Linjal Obs! Höjddifferensen
För motorer som väger mer än 25 kg är de faktiska får inte överstiga
vikten instämplad på märkskylt. ± 0,1 mm mellan
något av fotlägena.
Aluminium Gjutjärn Stål
Storlek Vikt Lägg till Vikt Vikt
kg för broms kg kg
56 4,5 - - -
63 6 - - -
Fotlägen
71 8 5 13 -
80 12 8 20 -
90 17 10 30 - Fästklotsar
100 25 16 40 - Skruva fast fästklotsarna vid motorns fötter och placera
112 36 20 50 - en 1 - 2 mm mellanläggsplåt mellan klotsen och foten.
132 63 30 90 - Rikta upp motorn med hjälp av en lämplig metod. Gjut
160 110 30 175 - fast klotsarna med betong, kontrollera uppriktningen
180 160 45 250 - och borra hål för och fäst styrpinnar.
200 220 55 310 -
225 295 75 400 - Dräneringshål
250 370 75 550 - Kontrollera att öppna dräneringshål mynnar neråt då
280 405 - 800 600 monteringssättet avviker från standard.
315 - - 1700 1000
355 - - 2700 2200 I extremt dammiga miljöer skall alla dräneringshål vara
400 - - 3500 3000 stängda.
450 - - 5000 4500
Tabell 1 2.3.3 Uppriktning
Korrekt uppriktning är nödvändigt för att undvika
lagerproblem, vibrationer och eventuellt axeltappsbrott.
2.3 Uppställning
2.3.4 Spännlinjaler och remdrift
2.3.1 Kylning
– Fäst motorn vid spännlinjalerna såsom visas i figur 2.
Normal omgivningstemperatur bör inte överskrida 40 °C – Placera spännlinjalerna horisontalt på samma nivå.
(marin standard +40 eller +50 °C) för att – Kontrollera att motorns axel är parallell med den
standardprestanda ska kunna uppnås. Kontrollera att drivna axeln.
motorn får tillräckligt kylluftflöde. Se till att inga ytor eller – Spänn remmarna i enlighet med leverantörens
angränsande utrustning strålar ytterligare värme mot anvisningar.
motorn. För ytterligare information om högre
omgivningstemperaturer och kylning, se ”The Motor
Guide” eller kontakta ABB:s försäljningskontor. VARNING
För hög remspänning skadar lagren och kan
förorsaka axelbrott.
2.3.2 Fundament
Beställaren ansvarar för utförandet av fundamentet. Överskrid inte maximal remkraft (tillåten radiell kraft på
Fundament av metall skall vara målade för att förhindra lagret) angiven i tillämplig produktkatalog.
korrosion.
Fundamenten skall vara plana och tillräckligt stabila för
att motstå kortslutningskrafterna. De skall vara så
dimensionerade så att vibrationer inte uppstår på grund
av egenfrekvens.
SE
potentialutjämning.
Vissa motorer kan levereras, med roterbar, 4 x 90 °,
uttagslåda ovanpå motorn, och andra med Potentialutjämning
sidomonterad uttagslåda.
Skena Kablar/ledare
Produktkatalogerna anger om dessa alternativ är
möjliga.
Oanvända hål för kabelanslutning skall vara täckta.
Driven
Förutom anslutningar för huvudlindning och jord kan maskin
uttagslådan också innehålla anslutningar för termistorer,
värmeelement för stilleståndsuppvärmning,
temperaturvakter av bimetalltyp eller PT100 För att uppfylla gällande EMC-krav, använd endast
motståndselement. kablar och anslutningsdon som är godkända för
ändamålet. (Se instruktionerna för frekvensomriktare.)
VARNING Det högsta tillåtna varvtalet för en gjutjärnsmotor som
Anslutningar kan vara spänningsförande även när används i ett varvtalsreglerat drivsystem (M2BA/M3BP)
motorn står stilla, eftersom värmeelement eller får inte överstiga det maxvarvtal som anges i tabell 2
direkt lindningsvärmning kan vara aktiverade. nedan eller det varvtal som är inpräglat i märkskylten.
Kontakta ABB för information om högsta tillåtna
Anslutningsscheman för hjälpfunktioner finns i hastighet för andra motorstorlekar och motortyper.
uttagslådans lock eller på extra etiketter på motorns Smörjning av lager skall ske enligt instruktioner längre
stomme. fram i texten.
SE
4.1.1 Allmänt underhåll 4.1.4 Motorer med smörjnipplar
– Inspektera motorn regelbundet.
– Håll motorn ren och säkerställ fri tillgång till Smörjskyltsinformation och allmänna
ventilationsluft. smörjningsråd
– Kontrollera axeltätningarnas tillstånd (t.ex V-ringar) Om motorn är försedd med smörjskylt så skall denna
och ersätt dem om det är nödvändigt. följas.
– Kontrollera nätanslutningarnas tillstånd och alla
skruvar för uppställning och montage. På smörjskylten kan anges smörjintervall med hänsyn
– Kontrollera lagrenas tillstånd genom att lyssna efter taget till monteringssätt, omgivningstemperatur och
främmande ljud, vibrationsmätning, mäta varvtal.
lagrenas temperatur, inspektera det använda fettet Vid första starten eller efter en smörjning av lagren kan
eller utnyttja SPM lagerövervakning. en tillfällig temperaturhöjning uppträda, under cirka 10 -
* Om det uppträder ändringar i tillståndet
20 timmar. ABB har som policy att sätta tillförlitligheten i
så demontera motorn, kontrollera ingående
delar och ersätt de delar som behöver första rummet vid val av smörjintervall. Därför tillämpas
ersättas. L1-principen.
A. Manuell smörjning
4.1.2 Smörjning Smöjning under drift
– Ta bort fettutloppspluggen eller öppna
VARNING stängningsventilen, om sådan finns.
Se upp för roterande delar. – Se till att smörjkanalen är öppen
– Pressa in angiven mängd färskt fett i lagret.
VARNING – Låt motorn arbeta i 1 - 2 timmar så att allt
Fett kan förorsaka hudirritation och överskottsfett garanterat har trängt ut ur lagret. Sätt
ögoninflamation. Följ alla säkerhetsföreskrifter som tillbaka eventuell fettutloppsplugg.
angivits av fettleverantören. Smörjning under stillestånd
Motorer ska smörjas medan de arbetar. Om detta inte
4.1.3 Motorer med permanentsmorda är möjligt kan de i stället smörjas under stillestånd.
lager – Använd i så fall endast halva fettmängden och låt
därefter motorn arbeta några minuter vid max varvtal.
Lagren är vanligtvis permanentsmorda lager av typ Z – När motorn har stannat, pressa in resten av angiven
eller 2Z. mängd fett i lagret.
Lagertyper framgår av respektive produktkatalog och på – Efter 1 - 2 timmars drift, sätt tillbaka
märkskylten på alla motorer utom på de minsta fettutloppspluggen eller stäng ventilen, om sådan
storlekarna. finns.
Som riktvärde gäller att tillräcklig smörjning kan uppnås B. Automatisk smörjning
under följande tid, enligt L1 (d.v.s. att 99 % av Vid automatisk smörjning ska fettutloppspluggen
motorerna ska fungera störningsfritt under hela avlägsnas permanent och ev. stängningsventil vara
smörjintervallet) vid omgivningstemperaturen 25 °C. öppen.
För drifter i högre omgivningstemperaturer än 25 °C, En del motorer kan vara försedda med uppsamlare för
se respektive produktkatalog. gammalt fett. Följ i så fall de särskilda instruktionerna
Storlek Poliga Drifttimmar för denna utrustning.
56-80 2-8 på livstid Vi rekommenderar endast användning av elektro-
90-112 2-8 40 000 mekaniska system, kontakta ABB:s försäljningskontor.
132 2-8 40 000
160 2-8 40 000 Mängden smörjfett per smörjningsintervall som anges i
180 2-8 40 000 tabellerna 4 - 5 skall fördubblas om ett automatiskt
200 2 27 000 avfettningssystem används.
200 4 40 000 Om 2-poliga motorer smörjs via automatiska system
Tabell 3 skall anmärkningen (OBS!) beträffande
fettrekommendationer och 2-poliga motorer i kapitlet
Beroende på tillämpning och belastningsförhållanden. Lagerfett följas.
Se tillämplig produktkatalog.
SE
torn överstiger 400 000 (beräknat som Dm x n De flesta av våra motorer har en ljudtrycksnivå som ej
där Dm = lagrets medeldiameter (mm); n = varvtal, överstiger 82 dB(A) vid 50 Hz och sinusmatning, med
r/min). tolerans ± 3 dB(A).
Följande typer av fett kan användas: Värden för specifika motorer kan hittas i respektive
– FAG L69 (polyureabas) produktkataloger.
– Klüber Klüber quiet BH 72-102 (polyureabas) För ljudtrycksnivåer vid 60 Hz sinusmatning och vid
– Lubcon Turmogrease PU703 (polyureabas) annat än sinusmatning, kontakta ABB:s
Vid användning av andra fettfabrikat, kontrollera med försäljningskontor.
tillverkaren att egenskaperna överensstämmer med de Ljudtrycksnivåerna för alla motorer med separata
ovan nämnda fetterna. Vid osäkerhet om kylsystem och för serierna M2F*/M3F*, M2L*/M3L*,
kompatibiliteten, kontakta ABB:s försäljningskontor. M2R*/M3R*, M2BJ/M3BJ och M2LJ/M3LJ finns angivna
i separata manualer.
VARNING
För mycket smörjfett kan ge skador, speciellt vid
höga varvtal (varvtalsfaktor > 400000).
4.1.7 Frekvensomriktardrift
Högvarvsdrifter (t.ex frekvensomriktardrifter) eller lägre
varvtal vid stor last kräver kortade smörjintervall.
Kontakta ABB:s försäljningskontor i sådana fall.
En fördubbling av varvtalet t.ex kräver en minskning av
smörjintervallen till omkring 40 % av ovanstående
tabells värden.
VARNING
Motorns högsta konstruktionsvarvtal får inte
överskridas (se tabell 2).
4.1.8 Reservdelar
Vid beställning av reservdelar skall motorns fullständiga
typbeteckning och beställningsnummer anges enligt
märkskyltens uppgifter.
Om motorn är försedd med ett tillverkningsnummer
skall detta också uppges.
Ytterligare information finns på vår webbsida
www.abb.com/partsonline.
4.1.9 Omlindning
Omlindningen skall alltid utföras av kvalificerade
reparationsverkstäder.
Omlindningen av smoke venting och specialmotorer
skall inte utföras utan att först kontakta ABB:s
försäljningskontor.
SE
igensatta så att motorn inte får kylluften kan strömma fritt.
tillräcklig kylning
En fas kan vara öppen Kontrollera att samtliga ledare är korrekt
anslutna.
Jordsluten spole Hitta och åtgärda felet.
Obalanserad matningsspänning Kontrollera om det finns felaktiga ledare,
anslutningar och transformatorer.
Motorn vibrerar Motorn felaktigt uppriktad Rikta upp motorn.
Svagt fundament Förstärk fundamentet.
Obalanserad koppling Balansera kopplingen.
Driven utrustning obalanserad Balansera den drivna utrustningen.
Lagerfel Byt lager.
Lager ej uppriktade Rikta upp lagren.
Balanseringsvikterna har förskjutits Balansera om motorn.
Bristande kompatibilitet mellan rotor- Balansera om kopplingen eller motorn.
och kopplingsbalansering (halv kil
– hel kil)
Flerfasmotor drivs med enfas- Kontrollera om någon krets är öppen.
matning
För stort axeländspel Justera lager eller sätt in shims.
Skrapljud Fläkten i kontakt med kåpan Åtgärda felet.
Fläkten i kontakt med Åtgärda fläkten.
isolationsmaterialet
Motorn lös på fundamentplattan Dra åt fästskruvarna.
Onormalt driftljud Ojämt luftgap Kontrollera och korrigera lagerbockarna eller
lagren.
Rotor obalanserad Balansera om.
Lagerkulor överhettade Böjd eller sned axel Rikta upp eller byt axeln.
För hög remspänning Minska remspänningen.
Remskivan för långt från axel- För remskivan närmare motorlagret.
ansatsen
För liten remskivediameter Använd större remskivor.
Bristande uppriktning Korrigera genom att rikta upp drivsystemet.
Bristande smörjning Se till att lagerfett av rätt kvalitet används.
Fettet eller smörjmedlet förbrukat Avlägsna gammalt fett, tvätta lagret grundligt
eller förorenat med fotogen och pressa in nytt fett.
För mycket smörjmedel Minska fettmängden. Lagret ska inte vara fyllt
mer än till hälften.
Överhettat lager Kontrollera uppriktningen samt den radiella och
axiella belastningen.
Skadade kulor eller löpbanor Byt lager och rengör samtidigt lagerhuset
noggrant.
FI
Sisältö Sivu
1. Yleistä ...............................................................................................................................76
1.1 Vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus .............................................................................76
1.2 Voimassaolo ............................................................................................................76
2. Asennus ...........................................................................................................................76
2.1 Käyttöönotto (käynnistys) .........................................................................................76
2.1.1 Vastaanottotarkastus ...................................................................................76
2.1.2 Eristysvastuksen tarkistaminen ...................................................................76
2.1.3 Suora tai tähtikolmiokäynnistys ...................................................................77
2.1.4 Liitännät ja pyörimissuunta ..........................................................................77
2.2 Käsittely ..................................................................................................................77
2.2.1 Varastointi ....................................................................................................77
2.2.2 Kuljetus ........................................................................................................77
2.2.3 Nostaminen..................................................................................................77
2.2.4 Moottorin paino ............................................................................................78
2.3 Asennus ...................................................................................................................78
2.3.1 Jäähdytys.....................................................................................................78
2.3.2 Alusta ...........................................................................................................78
2.3.3 Linjaus .........................................................................................................78
2.3.4 Kiristyskiskot ja hihnakäytöt .........................................................................78
2.4 Kytkentä ...................................................................................................................79
2.4.1 Taajuusmuuttajakäytöt.................................................................................79
2.5 Tasapainotus ...........................................................................................................79
3. Käyttö ...............................................................................................................................80
3.1 Ympäristö .................................................................................................................80
3.1.1 Käyttöolosuhteet ..........................................................................................80
3.2 Turvallisuusnäkökohtia ............................................................................................80
3.2.1 Huomioitavia seikkoja ..................................................................................80
3.3 Kokoonpano ja purku ...............................................................................................80
3.3.1 Yleistä ..........................................................................................................80
3.3.2 Laakerit ........................................................................................................80
3.3.3 Kytkinpuolikkaiden ja hihnapyörien asentaminen ........................................80
4. Kunnossapito ..................................................................................................................81
4.1 Huolto ja voitelu .......................................................................................................81
4.1.1 Yleinen tarkistus ..........................................................................................81
4.1.2 Voitelu ..........................................................................................................81
4.1.3 Kestovoidelluilla laakereilla varustetut moottorit ..........................................81
4.1.4 Voitelunipoilla varustetut moottorit ...............................................................81
4.1.5 Voiteluvälit ja -ainemäärät ...........................................................................82
4.1.6 Voiteluaineet ................................................................................................82
4.1.7 Taajuusmuuttajakäytöt.................................................................................83
4.1.8 Varaosat ......................................................................................................83
4.1.9 Uudelleenkäämintä ......................................................................................83
5. Ympäristövaatimukset ....................................................................................................83
5.1 Äänitaso ...................................................................................................................83
6. Moottorin vianetsintätaulukko .......................................................................................84
FI
tärinättömissä ja pölyttömissä olosuhteissa.
2.1.3 Suora tai tähtikolmiokäynnistys
Moottorin suojaamattomat kohdat (akselin päät ja
Vakioyksinopeusmoottorin liitäntäkotelossa on yleensä
laipat) tulee suojata korroosionestoaineella.
kuusi staattoriliitintä ja ainakin yksi maadoitusliitin.
Akselia suositellaan pyöritettävän säännöllisin väliajoin
Maadoitus on hoidettava paikallisten määräysten
käsin rasvan muuttumisen estämiseksi.
mukaan ennen moottorin kytkemistä verkkojännitteelle.
Mahdollisten seisontalämmitysvastusten pitäisi olla
Jännite ja kytkentä on leimattu arvokilpeen.
kytkettynä.
Suora käynnistys: Mikäli yksivaihemoottoreihin on asennettu elektro-
Y- tai D-kytkentää voidaan käyttää. Esimerkiksi 660 VY, lyyttiset kondensaattorit, on ne ”herätettävä” uudelleen
380 VD tarkoittaa Y-kytkentää 660 V ja D-kytkentää varastointiajan ylittäessä 1 - 2 vuotta. Ota yhteyttä
380 V. ABB:n tuotemyyntiin saadaksesi lisäohjeita.
FI
4 x 90 asteen käännettävällä moottorin päällä olevalla
liitäntäkotelolla tai sivulle asennettavalla liitäntäkotelolla.
Nämä vaihtoehdot on kuvattu tuote-esitteissä. Työkone
FI
4.1.1 Yleinen tarkistus moottorit
– Pidä moottori puhtaana ja huolehdi jäähdytysilman
vapaasta kulusta. Voiteluohjekilpi ja yleistä voitelusta
– Seuraa tiivisteiden (esim. V-rengas) kuntoa ja uusi ne Jos moottorissa on voiteluohjekilpi, noudata siinä
tarvittaessa. olevia arvoja.
– Seuraa kytkentöjen ja kiinnitysruuvien kuntoa.
– Tarkkaile laakerien kuntoa laakeriääntä kuuntele- Voiteluohjekilvestä voidaan määrittää jälkivoiteluväli
malla, laakerien tärinää tai lämpötilaa mittaamalla, asennusasennon, lämpötilan ja kierrosluvun suhteen.
poistuvaa voiteluainetta tarkkailemalla tai SPM- Ensimmäisen käynnistyksen aikana tai laakerin voitelun
valvontalaitteilla. jälkeen voi esiintyä väliaikaista lämpötilan kohoamista
* Kun muuttumista alkaa tapahtua, avaa noin 10 - 20 tunnin ajan.
moottori ja tarkista osat ja uusi ne
tarvittaessa. ABB:n lähtökohtana voiteluvälejä määriteltäessä on
käyttövarmuus. Siksi noudatamme L1-periaatetta.
FI
halkaisija mm:nä ja n = pyörimisnopeus, rpm) on
korkeampi kuin 400 000, käytä suurnopeusvoitelu- arvot perustuvat 50 Hz:n sinimuotoiseen käyttöön,
aineita. hyväksyttävä toleranssi ± 3 dB(A).
VAROITUS
Liiallinen voitelu voi aiheuttaa vaurioita erityisesti
suurilla pyörimisnopeuksilla (nopeuskerroin
> 400 000).
4.1.7 Taajuusmuuttajakäytöt
Suuret nopeudet, esim. taajuusmuuttajakäytössä, tai
hitaat käytöt raskaasti kuormitettaessa lyhentävät
voiteluvälejä. Pyydä ohjeita ABB:n tuotemyynnistä
näissä tapauksissa.
Nopeuden kaksinkertaistaminen lyhentää voiteluvälejä
n. 40 %:iin taulukon arvoista.
VAROITUS
Moottorin suurinta sallittua pyörimisnopeutta ei saa
ylittää (katso taulukko 2).
4.1.8 Varaosat
Tilatessasi varaosia ilmoita moottorin arvokilpeen
leimattu täydellinen lajimerkki ja tuotekoodi.
Ilmoita myös moottorin valmistusnumero, mikäli se on
leimattu arvokilpeen.
Lisätietoja on kotisivuillamme osoitteessa
www.abb.com/partsonline.
4.1.9 Uudelleenkäämintä
Uudelleenkäämintään tulee käyttää vain luotettavia
moottorikorjaamoita.
Ota aina yhteys ABB:n tuotemyyntiin ennen savu-
kaasun poistoon tarkoitettujen moottoreiden ja muiden
erikoismoottoreiden uudelleenkäämintää.
Moottorin vianetsintäkaavio
Moottorin huoltoa ja korjaustoimenpiteitä suorittavan henkilön on oltava pätevä ja turvallisuusmääräyksen tunteva
ammattilainen, jolla on asianmukaiset työkalut ja -välineet.
FI
Moottorissa voi olla yksi vaihe poikki Tarkista kytkentä.
Maasulku Paikallista ja korjaa.
Epäsymmetrinen syöttöjännite Tarkista johtimet, kytkennät ja muuntajat.
moottoriliittimillle
Moottori tärisee Linjaus väärä Linjaa moottori oikein.
Moottorin alusta heikko Vahvista alusta.
Kytkin epätasapainossa Tasapainota kytkin.
Käytettävä laite epätasapainossa Tasapainota laite uudelleen.
Vialliset laakerit Vaihda laakerit.
Roottorin tasapainotus muuttunut Tasapainota roottori uudelleen.
Roottorin ja kytkimen tasapainotus Tasapainota kytkin uudelleen.
eroaa (puoli kiila – täysi kiila)
Kolmivaiheinen moottori käy Tarkista kytkennät.
yksivaiheisena
Liian suuri aksiaalivälys Tarkista laakerointi.
Hankaava ääni Tuuletin hankaa suojukseen Korjaa tuuletin/suojus.
Tuuletin koskettaa eristykseen Estä kosketus.
Moottori irronnut alustastaan Kiristä kiinnityspultit ja tarkista linjaus.
Meluinen käyntiääni Ilmaväli ei ole keskeinen Tarkista ohjaussorvaus ja laakerit.
Roottori epätasapainossa Tasapainota uudelleen.
Laakereiden Puutteellinen voitelu Voitele laakerit.
kuumeneminen Väärä voiteluaine Valitse oikea voiteluaine.
Voiteluainetta liikaa Vähennä voiteluaineen määrää.
Laakerit likaantuneet tai voiteluaine Poista vanha voiteluaine, puhdista laakerit ja
vanhentunut vaihda uusi voiteluaine.
Ylikuormitetut laakerit Tarkista linjaus, säteis- ja aksiaalivoimat.
Laakeri vioittunut Vaihda laakerit ja puhdista laakeripesä
huolellisesti.
Taipunut tai rikkoutunut akseli Vaihda roottori.
Liiallinen hihnan kireys Tarkista kireys.
Hihnapyörä liian leveä Tarkista leveys.
Hihnapyörän halkaisija liian pieni Käytä halkaisijaltaan suurempaa hihnapyörää.
Moottori ei ole linjassa Linjaa moottori uudelleen.
http://www.abb.com/motors&drives
http://online.abb.com/motors&drives
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Assembly Plan
129
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOA-H
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
130
Operating instructions
0570.8/21-10
Shut-off valves
BOA-SuperCompactR
BOAR-Compact
BOAR-Compact EKB
BOAR-W
BOAR-H
Non-return valves
BOAR-R
BOAR-RVK
Strainers
BOAR-S
1 EC declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1 Symbols used in these operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 Personnel qualification and training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.3 Non-compliance with safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.4 Safety awareness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.5 Safety instructions for the operator / user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.6 Safety instructions for maintenance, inspection and installation work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.7 Unauthorized modification and manufacture of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.8 Unauthorized modes of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4 Transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.1 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.2 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5 Specification / Relevant documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.1 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
5.2 Drawings / Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5.3 List of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.4 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6.2 Fields of application / Operating data / Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
7 Commissioning, start-up / shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.1 Operation / commissiong / start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.2 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
8 Servicing / maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
8.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
8.2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
8.3 Testing overhauled valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
9 Trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
9.2 Faults / malfunctions > Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
These operating instructions contain important information and precautions. It is imperative that the manual be read prior to installation
and commissioning.
The manual shall always be kept close to the valve’s location of installation.
PED 97/23/EC
1 EC declarations of conformity
EC Declaration of Conformity
declare that the valves listed below satisfy the safety requirements laid down in the Pressure Equipment
Directive 97/23/EC (PED).
Non-return valves
-- BOA-R JL1040 PN 6 DN 15-200
-- BOA-R JL1040 PN 16 DN 15-350
-- BOA-R JS1025 PN 16 DN 15-200 1)
1) DN15--65 also to AD 2000 code
And other standards / codes: DIN 3840 Paras. 1.3 and 4.3
1)and 2) also to AD 2000 code
Valves of DN ≤ 25 (PN 16/25) fall under Article 3, Section 3, of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
They must bear neither the CE marking nor the identification number of a notified body.
Rainer Michalik
Quality Management
(This document has been prepared electronically and is valid without signature.)
2
EC Declaration of Conformity
declare that the valves listed below satisfy the safety requirements laid down in the Pressure Equipment
Directive 97/23/EC (PED).
And other standards / codes: DIN 3840 Paras. 1.3 and 4.3
Valves of DN ≤ 50 (PN 16), DN ≤ 100 (PN 10) and DN ≤ 150 (PN 6) fall under Article 3, Section 3, of the
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. They must bear neither the CE marking nor the identification number
of a notified body.
Rainer Michalik
Quality Management
(This document has been prepared electronically and is valid without signature.)
3
EC Declaration of Conformity
declare that the valves listed below satisfy the safety requirements laid down in the Pressure Equipment
Directive 97/23/EC (PED).
Valves of DN ≤ 50 (PN 16), DN ≤ 100 (PN 10) and DN ≤ 150 (PN 6) fall under Article 3, Section 3, of the
Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC. They must bear neither the CE marking nor the identification number
of a notified body.
Rainer Michalik
Quality Management
(This document has been prepared electronically and is valid without signature.)
4
EC Declaration of Conformity
declare that the valves listed below satisfy the safety requirements laid down in the Pressure Equipment
Directive 97/23/EC (PED).
Valves of DN ≤ 25 (PN 16/25) fall under Article 3, Section 3, of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
They must bear neither the CE marking nor the identification number of a notified body.
Rainer Michalik
Quality Management
(This document has been prepared electronically and is valid without signature.)
5
EC Declaration of Conformity
declare that the valves listed below satisfy the safety requirements laid down in the Pressure Equipment
Directive 97/23/EC (PED).
Valves of DN ≤ 25 (PN 16/25) fall under Article 3, Section 3, of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC.
They must bear neither the CE marking nor the identification number of a notified body.
Rainer Michalik
Quality Management
(This document has been prepared electronically and is valid without signature.)
6
2 General instructions 3 Safety
These operating instructions apply to KSB valve types These operating instructions contain important information which must
BOA-SuperCompactR, BOA-CompactR, BOA-CompactR EKB, be observed during installation, operation and maintenance. Therefore
BOAR-W, BOAR-H, BOAR-R, BOAR-RVK and BOAR-S. this operating manual must be read and understood both by the installing
Address: personnel and the responsible trained personnel / operators prior to
KSB Aktiengesellschaft installation and commissioning, and it must always be kept close to the
Johann-Klein-Straße 9 location of operation of the valve for easy access.
67227 Frankenthal In addition to the general safety instructions laid down in this chapter on
The design, manufacture and testing of KSB valves are subject to a QM “Safety”, the special safety instructions provided in other sections must
system to DIN EN ISO 9001 and satisfy the safety requirements put forth also be observed.
in Annex I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EG (PED).
Certification to the Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC has been 3.1 Symbols used in these operating
obtained in accordance with Module H (BOAR-RVK with Module A). instructions
Only correct installation, maintenance or repair will ensure smooth The safety instructions contained in this manual whose non-observance
operation of the valves. might cause hazards to persons are specially marked with the general
The manufacturer shall not accept any liability if the instructions set forth hazard sign, namely
in this manual are not complied with.
The valves must not be operated outside the
Caution
permissible operating range. The application limits are
indicated on the name plate or in the applicable type series booklet. The
pressure / temperature ratings, in particular, must not be exceeded. safety sign in accordance with DIN 4844 - W 9.
Operation of the valves outside the above-mentioned conditions will The electrical danger warning sign is
result in overloads the valves cannot withstand.
The type series booklets can be found at www.ksb.com -- product
catalogue.
Non-observance of this warning may cause personal injury and
damage to property, for example:
safety sign in accordance with DIN 4844 – W 8.
-- injuries resulting from fluid leakage (cold / hot, toxic, under pressure,
The word
...)
-- impairment of the valve’s function or its destruction.
The descriptions and instructions set forth in this manual refer to the Caution
standard models but are also applicable to variants.
Valves with actuator is used to introduce safety instructions whose non-observance may lead
to damage to the valve and its accessories and its / their functions.
For actuated valves (electric / pneumatic actuator), the operating manual
of the actuator must be adhered to without fail. Instructions attached directly to the valve (e. g. nominal pressure) must
always be complied with and be kept in a perfectly legible condition at all
These operating instructions do not take into account: times.
-- any eventualities and events which might occur during installation,
operation and maintenance. 3.2 Personnel qualification and training
-- local regulations; the operator must ensure that such regulations are All personnel involved in operating, maintaining, servicing, inspecting
strictly observed by all, including the personnel called in for and installing the equipment must be fully qualified to carry out the work
installation. involved. Personnel responsibilities, competence and supervision must
The valve must only be operated by skilled, properly be clearly defined by the operator. If the personnel in question does not
Caution already possess the requisite know-how, appropriate training and
trained personnel.
instruction must be provided. If required, the operator may commission
All personnel involved in the operation, inspection and installation must the manufacturer / supplier to take care of such training. In addition, the
be fully aware of the interaction between the valve and the system. operator is responsible for ensuring that the contents of the operating
The valves are actuated via the handwheel. The closing direction is instructions are fully understood by the responsible personnel.
marked on the handwheel.
Clockwise = Closing the valve 3.3 Non-compliance with safety instructions
Counter-clockwise = Opening the valve Non-compliance with safety instructions can jeopardize the safety of
(cf. Section 7.1, Actuation) personnel, the environment, the valve and / or the system.
Valve types BOAR-R, BOAR-RVK and BOAR-S are not fitted with Non-compliance with these safety instructions will also lead to forfeiture
handwheels or other external actuating elements. of any and all rights to claims for damages.
Incorrect operation of the valve may have a substantial impact on the
entire system, for example:
-- leakage of the fluid handled
-- system / machine brought to a standstill
-- impairment / reduction / increase of the system’s / machine’s
function / effect.
For any queries you may have or in the case of damage, please contact
KSB Aktiengesellschaft.
For any queries and repeat orders, in particular for purchasing spare
parts, please specify the type series / variant details or the works / serial
number, as well as the year of construction, if possible.
The technical data (operating data) of the valves are specified in the
technical literature (type series booklet, valve characteristic, chemical
resistance chart) of the respective valve (cf. Section 5).
If the valve must be returned, proceed in accordance with Section 4,
Transport.
7
In particular, non-compliance can, for example, result in: 4 Transport and storage
-- failure of important valve / system functions,
-- failure of prescribed maintenance and servicing practices, 4.1 Transport
-- hazard to persons by electrical, mechanical and chemical effects, The valves are in closed position when supplied and, where required, the
-- hazard to the environment due to leakage of hazardous substances. line connection ports are capped. The valves are ready for operation
upon delivery, the exception being original spare parts which are only
3.4 Safety awareness ready for operation following assembly / installation and the subsequent
shell / pressure / leak tests (cf. Section 7.1).
It is imperative to comply with the safety instructions contained in this
manual, the relevant national health and safety regulations and the For transport and interim storage, the valves must
Caution
operator’s own internal work, operation and safety regulations. always be kept in the closed position, and the line
connection ports must be covered with suitable material (e. g. caps, foil)
3.5 Safety instructions for the operator / user to avoid damage to the seat / disc contact faces.
-- Any hot or cold valve components (e. g. body components or
Valves with plastic coating such as
handwheel) that could pose a hazard must be equipped with a guard Caution
by the operator. BOA-CompactR EKB (EKB = electrostatic plastic
-- Leakages (e.g. at the stem seal) of hazardous fluids (e.g. explosive, coating), shall be transported in such a way that damage to the plastic
toxic, hot) must be contained so as to avoid any danger to persons and coating is prevented.
the environment. All relevant laws must be heeded.
In order to avoid damage or personal injury the valve
-- Electrical hazards must be eliminated. (For details please refer to VDE Caution
must never be suspended from the handwheel or
regulations and the safety regulations laid down by the local energy actuator, if any, during transport.
supply companies, for instance).
Please observe the hoisting instructions on page 16!
3.6 Safety information for maintenance, For the valve weights refer to the relevant manufacturer documentation
inspection and installation work (type series booklet ----> Section 5.2 Relevant documentation; order
confirmation).
The operator is responsible for ensuring that all maintenance, inspection
and installation work be performed by authorized, qualified specialist After delivery and prior to installation, check the valve for potential
personnel who are thoroughly familiar with the manual. damage acquired in transit. Damaged valves must not be installed.
Work on the valve must only be carried out after the valve has cooled
4.2 Storage
down and valve pressure has been released. The fluid temperature must
be below the vaporization temperature limit in all areas in contact with the Storage / interim storage of the valves must ensure that even after a
fluid. prolonged period of storage the valves’ function is not impaired and
For safety reasons, the fitter / qualified personnel must verify whether all damage to the plastic coating (BOA-CompactR EKB) is prevented. The
measures required for the protection of persons have been taken prior following requirements must be met:
to starting any work. -- Storage is performed with the valve in closed position (to protect the
Valves handling fluids (media) injurious to health must be seat / disc contact faces against damage)
decontaminated. -- Measures are taken to protect the valves against dirt (dust, sand,
Immediately following completion of the work, all safety-relevant and mortar and / or building material), frost and corrosion by using foils or
protective devices must be re-installed and / or re-activated. Please caps, for instance.
observe all instructions set out in Section 7, Commissioning / Start-up, When storing valves of the BOA-SuperCompactR, BOA-CompactR,
before returning the valve to service. BOA-CompactR EKB, BOAR-W series (seat / disc interface and / or
Work on actuated valves must be carried out only during standstill. The stem seal made of elastomers), please observe the guidelines for the
shutdown procedure described in the manual for taking the actuator out storage of elastomers (DIN 7716):
of service must be adhered to without fail. -- The storage room shall be dry, free from dust and moderately
ventilated. The ambient temperature must not exceed +25oC.
3.7 Unauthorized modification and manufacture -- Stocked valves should be used first to ensure that the periods of
of spare parts storage are as short as possible.
The modification or repair of the valve supplied are only permitted after -- BOA-SuperCompactR, BOA-CompactR, BOA-CompactR EKB
consultation with the manufacturer. Original spare parts supplied by the BOAR-W must not be exposed to solvents, lubricants, fuels and
manufacturer ensure safety. The use of other parts than the original chemicals. The EPDM elastomer at the valve disc and stem seal will
spare parts will lead to forfeiture of the declaration of conformity and will be impaired by these substances.
invalidate any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage. EPDM = ethylene-propylene-diene rubber
-- The valves must be stored such that the valve disc is not exposed to
3.8 Unauthorized modes of operation sunlight or UV light from other sources.
The warranty relating to the operating reliability and safety of the valve -- As mentioned above, the valves are required to be stored in closed
supplied is only valid if the equipment is used in accordance with its position. However, the valve discs on soft-seated valves must be
designated use as described in Section 2, General, of this manual. The closed using little force to prevent premature aging of the elastomer.
limits stated in the technical literature (pressure / temperature ratings to
DIN EN1092-2 see Section 6.2 and applicable type series booklet) must
not be exceeded under any circumstances.
8
5 Specification / Relevant BOAR-H, BOAR-R and BOAR-S
for fluids in Groups 1 and 2
documentation
PN DN
The sectional drawings below provide examples of the general design /
configuration of the valves. For illustrations relating to specific valve ≤25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 ≥200
series and further information please refer to the respective type series 10
booklets. 16
25
5.1 Marking
≥40
General marking BOA-SuperCompactR, BOA-CompactR, BOA CompactR EKB,
BOAR-W and BOAR-RVK
Nominal diameter (DN...) for fluids in Group 2
Nominal pressure class (PN...)
PN DN
Manufacturer KSB ≤32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 ≥200
Type series / Model BOAR-.... 6
Year of construction (2002, 2003 etc.) (20..) 10
Material ......... 16
25
Flow direction arrow →
≥40
Traceability of the material .........
(from category II PED 97/23/EC) Fluid groups
CE marking Group 1 comprises fluids defined as
(from category I PED 97/23/EC) -- explosive,
Identification number of the notified body: 0036 -- extremely flammable,
(from category I PED 97/23/EC according to -- highly flammable,
module H)
-- flammable (where the maximum allowable temperature is above
Marking of 3.1 acceptance test flashpoint),
(shell / pressure and leak test)
-- very toxic,
-- toxic,
Marking attached to the product on customer’s request: -- oxidizing.
System / Unit No., etc. ......... Group 2 comprises all other fluids not referred to in Group 1.
9
5.2 Drawings / Documentation
Shut-off valves with elastomer stem seal, maintenance-free
580.1 *E
961 *E 580 *E
961 *E
904 *E 961 *E
904 *E 200 *E
925
offset by 90° 544 *E
506
410 *E
410 506 *E
410 506 901 *E
506 100
161 *E
200 412 *E
100
200
350 350 *E
350
100
580 *E
*E = available as spare part
961 *E
Complete bonnet *E
925
901 *E
(902) *E 45-6
(920) *E 454
461
161
411 *E
350 *E
100 *E
10
Non-return valves
CuZn39Pb3
BOAR-RVK 15-200 6/10/16 7119 1
7119.1
EN-JL 1040
15-200 6
EN-JL 1040 7117 1
7117.1
BOAR-R 15-300 16
15-350 16 EN-JS 1025 7117.1
161 *E
411 *E
950 *E
100
351 *E
950
100 *E
198
BOAR-R BOAR-RVK
Strainers
758 Standard
or fine-mesh
strainer insert *E
BOAR-S
11
5.3 List of components BOAR-W
BOAR-W shut-off valves consist of a body (100) and bonnet (161). Body
Part No. Description
(100) and bonnet (161) are connected by hex. head bolts (901), or by
100 Body studs (902) with hex. nuts (920) if the valve is supplied with travel
161 Body bonnet / cover stop / position indicator variant kit, and sealed towards the outside by
198 Disc means of an O-ring (412).
200 Stem The functional unit basically consists of the valve disc (350) and the stem
350 Valve disc (200); the actuating element is a handwheel (961). The stem (200)
passage is sealed by a profile ring (410).
351 Check valve disc
410 Profile joint The stem seal is maintenance-free and does not require re-tightening.
411 Joint ring Non-return valves
411.1 Joint ring BOAR-R
454 Stuffing box ring Non-return valves are spring-loaded check valves which close
45-6 Stuffing box screw automatically if fluid flow is reversed.
461 Packing The valves of the BOAR-R series consist of the pressure-retaining parts,
506 Retaining ring i. e. body (100) and cover (161) and the functional unit, i.e. disc with
580 Cap spring. In BOAR-R valves, the check valve disc (351) is guided in or by
the body cover (161). The position of the check valve disc (351) is
758 Strainer insert
determined both by the flow conditions and by the spring (950) (standard
901 Hex. head bolt feature).
902 Stud BOAR-RVK
903 Screwed plug
Non-return valves are spring-loaded check valves which close
904 Grub screw automatically if fluid flow is reversed.
920 Hex. nut The valves of the BOAR-RVK series consist of a pressure-retaining
925 Stem nut single-piece body (100) and body cover (161) and the functional unit, i.e.
932 Circlip disc with spring. In BOAR-RVK valves, the disc (198) is guided in the
950 Spring body (100). The position of the disc (198) is determined both by the flow
961 Handwheel conditions and by the spring (950) (standard feature).
Strainers
5.4 Function
BOAR-S
Shut-off valves The valves of the BOAR-S series consist of the pressure-retaining parts,
BOA-SuperCompactR, BOA-CompactR, BOA-CompactR EKB i. e. body (100) and body cover (161) and strainer insert (758). Actuating
elements are not required on this valve type and therefore not supplied.
Shut-off valve types BOA-SuperCompactR, BOA-CompactR and
BOA-CompactR EKB have single-piece bodies (100) without separate The body (100) and cover (161) are connected by studs (902) and nuts
bonnets (161). The valves are provided with an elastomer stem seal. The (920), and the joint is sealed off by the joint ring (411). The strainer insert
functional unit basically consists of the valve disc (350) and the stem (standard or fine-mesh) (758) is clamped in the body neck and catches
(200); the actuating element is a handwheel (961). The stem (200) dirt particles depending on the mesh size (see type series booklet).
passage is sealed by a profile ring (412). The stem seal is The strainer requires regular maintenance (cleaning the strainer
maintenance-free and does not require re-tightening. insert).
BOAR-H
The valves of the BOAR-H series consist of the pressure-retaining parts,
i. e. body (100) and bonnet (161), the functional unit, i.e. stem and valve
disc, and the actuating element (handwheel). Body (100) and bonnet
(161) are connected by means of hex. head bolts (901) and hex. nuts
(920) (for EN-JL1040) or by means of studs (902) (for EN-JS1025) and
sealed towards the outside by a joint ring (411).
The functional unit of the bellows-type valve with back-up gland packing
basically consists of the valve disc (350), the stem (200) and the bellows
(442); the actuating element is a handwheel (961). The stem (200)
passage is sealed by means of the bellows (442) in accordance with the
German clean-air regulations. The back-up gland packing (461) is
tightened by means of 2 stuffing box screws (45-6) at the stuffing box ring
(454).
When delivered ex factory, the back-up gland packing is not fully
tightened. In the event of the bellows’ failure, the stuffing box
screws (back-up gland packing) must be tightened in order to avoid fluid
leakage (cf. Section 3, Safety).
The bellows-type stem seal is maintenance-free.
As a standard, the contact faces of body seat and / or valve disc (350)
are made of rust-proof materials or plastic rings (variant with PTFE disc).
12
6 Installation Proper diffusion-tight insulation (schematic)
Proper diffusion-tight insulation of the
complete valve including handwheel
6.1 General
Responsibility for positioning and installing the valves always lies with Removable
cap
the engineering company, construction company or operator/user.
Proper diffusion-
Planning and installation errors may impair the reliable function of the tight insulation of
valves and pose a substantial safety hazard. For this reason it is the valve
For safety reasons, valves and piping systems operated at high Valve types BOAR-H, BOAR-R, BOAR-S
(> 50°C) or low (< 0°C) temperatures must be insulated, or a in material EN-GJS-400-18-LT, data as per DIN EN 1092-2
warning sign must point out the risk of personal injury involved when
touching the hot or cold components. PN --10 to 150 °C 200 °C 250 °C 300 °C 350 °C
120 °C
If there is a risk of condensation water or ice formation,
Caution 16 16.0 15.5 14.7 13.9 12.8 11.2
for example in air-conditioning, cooling and 25 25.0 24.3 23.0 21.8 20.0 17.5
refrigerating systems, it is important to ensure that the complete valve
including handwheel, if required, is provided with a proper diffusion-tight Valve type BOAR-RVK
insulation. The formation of ice introduces the risk of valve actuator in material CuZn39Pb3 or EN-GJL-250, product-specific data
blocking. See sketch. PN 50 °C 80 °C 100 °C 120 °C 250 °C
6 6.0 4.0 2.0 -- --
6/10/16 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 13.0
13
The below data is an excerpt of the type series booklets: Please contact a KSB sales office before installing
BOA-CompactR EKB valves in copper pipes of industrial hot
BOA-SuperCompactR water systems from 30 °C to 70 °C .
Applications
Mating dimensions - Standards
Hot-water heating systems up to 120 °C to DIN 4751
Face-to-face lengths: EN 558-1/14 (was: DIN 3202/F 4) ISO 5752/14
Air-conditioning systems
Flanges: DIN EN 1092-2, flange type 21
Not suitable for fluids containing mineral oils, steam or fluids liable to
Flange facing: DIN EN 1092-2, type B
attack EPDM and cast iron (EN-JL1040).
Operating data BOAR -W
Temperature range: --10 to +120 °C (continuous) Applications
Pressure range: up to ∆p = 6, 10 and 16 bar Hot-water heating systems up to 120 °C to DIN 4751.
Installation instructions Air-conditioning systems
Not suitable for fluids containing mineral oils, steam or fluids liable to
Flow through BOA-SuperCompactR shut-off valves should be in the
attack EPDM and cast iron (EN-JL1040).
direction of the embossed arrow on the valve body.
Operating data
An alternating direction of flow is permissible, however.
Temperature range: --10 to +120 °C.
Mating dimensions - Standards
Pressure range: up to ∆p = 6 and 16 bar
Face-to-face lengths: DN length Nom. diameter = Face-to-face
Installation instructions
length (DN20/25 to DN150)
DN 200 Face-to-face length as per Flow through BOAR-W shut-off valves should be in the direction of the
EN 558-1/14 embossed arrow on the valve body. An alternating direction of flow is
Design: suitable for installation between flanges to permissible. For DN 200 valves, however, alternating flow is only
DIN EN 1092-2 permitted up to a differential pressure of 12 bar. For higher differential
DN 200 Flanges to DIN EN 1092-2 pressures BOAR-H shut-off valves with pilot plug (see type series
Flange type 21 booklet 7150.1) shall be used.
Flange facing: DIN EN 1092-2, type B Mating dimensions - Standards
BOA-CompactR Face-to-face lengths: EN 558-1/1 (was: DIN 3202/F 1) ISO 5752/1
Flanges: DIN EN 1092-2, flange type 21
Applications
Flange facing: DIN EN 1092-2, type B
Hot-water heating systems up to 120 °C to DIN 4751
Air-conditioning systems BOAR -H
Not suitable for fluids containing mineral oils, steam or fluids liable to Applications
attack EPDM and cast iron (EN-JL1040). Hot-water heating systems DIN 4751
Operating data High-temperature hot water heating systems DIN 4752
Temperature range: --10 to +120 °C (continuous) Heat transfer systems DIN 4754
Pressure range: up to ∆p = 6 and 16 bar Pressure vessel equipment to AD 2000 1)
1) The limits given in the technical codes shall be complied with.
Installation instructions
Operating data
Flow through BOA-CompactR shut-off valves should be in the direction
of the embossed arrow on the valve body. Temperature range: --10 to + 300 °C for EN-GJL-250
--10 to + 350 °C for EN-GJS-400-18-LT
An alternating direction of flow is permissible, however.
Pressure range: up to ∆p = 16 bar EN-GJL250 (DN15-300) and
Mating dimensions - Standards EN-GJS-400-18-LT (DN15-350)
Face-to-face lengths: EN 558-1/14 (was: DIN 3202/F 4) ISO 5752/14 up to ∆p = 25 bar EN-GJS-400-18-LT
Flanges DIN EN 1092-2, flange type 21 (DN 15-150)
Flange facing: DIN EN 1092-2, type B Installation instructions
BOA-CompactR EKB Flow through BOAR-H shut-off valves should be in the direction of the
Applications embossed arrow on the valve body. An alternating direction of flow is
permissible for valves with standard disc, but not for valves fitted with
Water supply systems, drinking water throttling discs. If the following differential pressures are exceeded on
Air-conditioning systems valves with standard discs from DN 200 upwards, a pilot plug design is
Cooling circuits required. The pilot plug only takes effect if there is a pressure build-up on
Not suitable for fluids containing mineral oils, steam or fluids liable to the outlet side (flow in the opposite direction of the arrow on the valve
attack EPDM and cast iron (EN-JL1040). body).
For installation in copper pipelines the installation instructions given
below must be complied with. DN 150 200 250 300/350
Not suitable for steam or fluids liable to attack EPDM and the electrostatic
PN 16 --
plastic coating (EKB). ∆p bar 12 9 6
PN 25 21
Operating data
Temperature range: --10 to +80 °C, for short periods +90 °C. The valves should not be installed with the stem (200) pointing
Pressure range: up to ∆p = 10 bar downwards to prevent dirt deposits between the folds of the
(DVGW version, German Association of the Gas bellows (442) which might cause valve failure. Shut-off valves must be
and Water Sector) installed in the line so that the fluid enters the valve beneath the disc (350)
up to ∆p = 16 bar and flows out above the disc. However, they can also be installed in lines
Installation instructions with alternating flow. If the valves are to be used for throttling
applications, a throttling valve disc (standard variant) must be used. In
Flow through BOA-CompactR EKB shut-off valves should be in the
valves with throttling discs, the flow direction must correspond to the
direction of the embossed arrow on the valve body. direction indicated by the arrow on the valve. If in doubt please contact
An alternating direction of flow is permissible, however. a KSB sales office. Valves with pilot plug are always installed so that the
When the valve is installed in copper pipes, fabric-reinforced pressure to be sealed off lies above the plug.
rubber gaskets (sealing elements to DIN EN 1514) must be fitted Mating dimensions - Standards
between the valves flanges and the pipe flanges, and insulating bushes
with centering collar made of polyamide (e.g. Korrex insulating bushes, Flanges: DIN EN 1092-2, flange type 21
available from fastener suppliers) must be fitted between the bolts and Flange facing: DIN EN 1092-2, type B
bolt holes (to avoid metal-to-metal contact between the valve and the Face-to-face lengths:
pipe if the coating should be damaged). Sealing elements and insulating Straight-way pattern EN 558-1/1 (was: DIN 3202/F 1) ISO 5752/1
bushes must be ordered from specialist suppliers. Angle pattern EN 558-1/8 (was: DIN 3202/F 32) ISO 5752/8
14
For temperatures > 200 °C and uninsulated valves please use Installation instructions
the valve variant with high-temperature resistant paint. The flow direction must correspond to the arrow cast on the valve body.
A minimum pressure is required for opening. If this minimum pressure is
BOAR -R
not reached, the spring can be dismantled. Valves without spring shall
Applications only be installed in vertical pipes with upward flow.
Hot-water heating systems DIN 4751 Valves of the BOAR-RVK series are clamped between the two
High-temperature hot water heating systems DIN 4752
mating flanges of the pipeline and centered by the flange bolting.
Heat transfer systems DIN 4754 A minimum pressure is required for opening BOAR-RVK valves. If this
Pressure vessel equipment to AD 2000 1) minimum pressure is not reached, the spring (950) can be dismantled.
1) The limits given in the technical codes shall be complied with.
Valves without spring shall only be installed in vertical pipes with upward
Operating data flow.
Temperature range: --10 to + 300 °C for EN-GJL-250 Mating dimensions - Standards
--10 to +350 °C for EN-GJS-400-18-LT
Face-to-face lengths: EN 558-1/49 (was: DIN 3202/K 4)
Pressure range: Straight-way pattern: up to ∆p = 6 or 16 bar
Can be installed between flanges: DIN 2501 PN 6-16,
Angle pattern: up to ∆p = 16 bar
ANSI B 16.1 25/125,
Installation instructions BS 4504 PN 6-16
The flow direction must correspond to the arrow indicated on the valve
body. A minimum pressure is required for opening. If this minimum
pressure is not reached, the spring can be dismantled. Without spring, BOAR -S
the valve shall only be installed in upright position in horizontal pipes. Applications
Minimum opening pressures (mbar) Hot and high-temperature hot water, steam, fluids containing mineral oils
and organic heat transfer media in systems or system components
DN 15-50 65-150 200-350 without special technical codes
with spring 250 200 150 Hot water heating systems DIN 4751
without spring 25 16 22 High-temperature hot water heating systems DIN 4752
Heat transfer systems DIN 4754
To ensure proper operation, non-return valves must always be Operating data
installed in such a way that the fluid enters the valve beneath the
Temperature range: --10 to +300 °C for EN-GJL-250
check valve disc (351). When equipped with a spring (950), they can be
--10 to +350 °C for EN-GJS-400-18-LT
used in both pipes with upward flow and pipes with downward flow.
Pressure range: up to ∆p = 6, 16 or 25 bar
Non-return valves without spring (950) shall only be installed in
horizontal position with the cover (161) pointing upwards in horizontal Installation instructions
pipes (cf. notes in section 6.2 BOAR-R). Compliance with the flow direction arrow is of paramount importance. If
Mating dimensions - Standards the strainer is installed incorrectly – with fluid flow opposite to the
directional arrow – its function will be impaired. In both horizontal and
Flanges: DIN EN 1092-2, flange type 21 vertical pipes, we recommend to install the strainer with the strainer
Flange facing: DIN EN 1092-2, type B insert hanging downwards to facilitate cleaning. Compliance with the
Face-to-face lengths: directional arrow is important.
Straight-way pattern: EN 558-1/1 (was: DIN 3202/F 4) ISO 5752/1
Angle pattern: EN 558-1/8 (was: DIN 3202/F 32) ISO 5752/8 Strainers shall always be installed in such a way that the fluid
flows through the strainer insert from the inside towards the out-
BOAR -RVK side (cage effect of the strainer insert). In horizontal pipes, the strainer
Applications insert is normally located below the pipe axis.
Industrial and heating systems Note: To ensure an optimum (i.e. high) Kv value, make sure when
Liquids, gases and steams replacing the strainer insert that the new insert is not installed with the
Hot-water heating systems DIN 4751 weld seam pointing towards the strainer outlet port.
High-temperature hot water heating systems DIN 4752 Mating dimensions - Standards
Heat transfer systems DIN 4754 (PN 6/10/16 only)
Any limits given in the technical codes shall be complied with. Face-to-face lengths: EN 558-1/1 (was: DIN 3202/F 1) ISO 5752/1
Not suitable for fluids liable to attack the valve materials. Flanges: DIN EN 1092-2, flange type 21
Flange facing: DIN EN 1092-2, type B
Operating data
Temperature range: PN 6: --30 *) to 100 °C
PN 6/10/16: --30 *) to 250 °C
*) for DN 125-200 (EN-GJL-250) down to --10 °C
Pressure range: up to ∆p = 6 or 16 bar
DN pö in mbar
$ # " without
" spring
15 20 16 24 4
20 20 16 24 4
25 20 16 24 4
32 20 16 24 4
40 20 15.5 24.5 4.5
50 20 15 25 5
65 20 14.5 25.5 5.5
80 20 13.5 26.5 6.5
100 20 13.5 26.5 6.5
125 20 34 14
150 20 33 13
200 20 32 12
15
7 Operation / commissioning, Caution Before tightening the bonnet bolting open the valve by
approximately two full turns of the handwheel to avoid
start-up / shutdown stress or distortion.
(Please also refer to Section 6, Installation) Re-tightening the bonnet / cover bolting is particularly important for
valves installed in heat transfer systems to DIN 4754.
7.1 Operation / commissiong / start-up
Valves with actuator
General For valves with (electric / pneumatic) actuators please refer to the
Prior to commissioning / start-up compare the material, pressure and separate operating manual supplied.
temperature data on the valves with the operating conditions of the piping
to check the material’s chemical resistance and stability under load. 7.2 Shutdown
Any surge pressures (waterhammer) must not exceed the max. In the event of prolonged shutdowns, fluids (media handled) which
permissible pressure (see pressure / temperature ratings in change their physical condition due to changes in concentration,
Section 6.2). Safety measures are required to be taken. Venting the valve polymerization, crystallization, solidification, etc. must be drained from
by undoing the bonnet / cover bolting or removing the gland packing is the piping system. If required, flush the piping with the valves fully
dangerous and therefore not permitted. opened.
It is generally not allowed to use lamellar graphite cast iron (EN-JL1040)
in systems where surge pressures might develop, since this material 8 Servicing / maintenance
does not withstand pressure surges and, therefore, the valves may be
damaged or destroyed. In such cases valves made of nodular cast iron
(EN-JS1025) or steel shall be used.
8.1 Safety instructions
In new systems and particularly after repair, the complete piping must be Repair and maintenance work must only be performed by skilled,
thoroughly flushed with the valves fully opened so that particles and / or properly trained personnel.
welding beads that might damage the seat / disc interface are removed. It is imperative that the below safety instructions and the general
information on safety as per Section 3, “Safetey”, be observed for all
Valve actuation servicing and maintenance work to be performed.
Viewed from above, the valve is closed with a clock-wise turn of the
Always use suitable original spare parts and tools --
handwheel, and opened with a counter clock-wise turn. Direction Caution
symbols are found on the top of the handwheel. even if sudden emergencies arise -- to ensure proper
functioning of the valve.
As the valve can be damaged by applying excessive
Caution
forces, it is not allowed to use additional levers to Valve dismantling
move the handwheels of nom. valve sizes up to and including DN 125. Before removing the complete valve from the pipeline or before repair or
This is of particular importantance for soft-seated valves types maintenance work to the valve itself, i.e.
(BOA-CompactR, BOA-SuperCompactR, BOA-CompactR EKB, -- before undoing the flange bolting between valve and pipe,
BOAR-W) but also applies to metal-seated valves (BOAR-H). On all
-- before undoing the bonnet bolting (902/920 or 901),
nominal sizes greater than DN 125, suitable additional levers may be
-- before undoing the stuffing box screw (45-6) at the stuffing box ring
used up to the following torque limits:
(454),
BOA-CompactR, BOA-SuperCompactR, BOA-CompactR EKB -- if the bellows is defective or there is fluid leakage in this area,
DN 150 200 -- before removing any drain, opening or vent plugs,
Mt [Nm] 120 140 valve pressure must be released and the valve must be allowed
Hex. head WAF 36 65 to cool down such that the temperature is below the fluid’s
vaporization temperature in all areas in contact with the fluid in order to
effectively prevent any risk of scalding.
BOAR-H
Never open a valve under pressure (danger to life!)
DN 150 200 250 300 350
Mt [Nm] 120 200 200 200 200
If toxic or easily inflammable fluids were handled, or fluids whose
Hex. head WAF 36 46 46 46 46 residues may cause corrosion in conjunction with humidity, drain the
valve and flush or vent it.
The above values do not apply in the event of foreign matter or fluid If required, wear safety clothing and a protective mask!
deposits in the seat / disc interface.
Shut-off valves are normally used in such a way that they are either fully
open or fully closed.
For control functions, variants with throttling disc should be fitted, unless
throttling discs are installed as a standard feature (e.g.
BOA-SuperCompactR, BOA-CompactR, BOA-CompactR EKB).
Performing throttling operations without a throttling
Caution
disc may result in an excessive noise level, excessive
wear or even destruction of the valve by cavitation.
Functional test
The following functions must be checked:
Check the shut-off function of the installed valve prior to
commissioning / start-up by opening and closing it several times.
The bonnet / cover bolting (902/920 or 901) on BOAR-H, BOAR-R,
BOAR-W and BOAR-S with the joint ring (411) or O-ring (412) shall be
checked for tightness after the first loading or heating up of the valves
(also applies to maintenance-free valves!). If required, the bonnet bolting
(902/920 or 901) must be gradually re-tightened cross-wise and evenly
in a clock-wise direction.
16
Depending on the installation position, fluid residues may be left in the 9 Trouble-shooting
valve; these must be collected and properly disposed of.
Prior to any transport, flush and drain the valve thoroughly. 9.1 General
For any queries please contact the nearest KSB sales branch.
KSB valves are robust in design. Nevertheless, malfunctions e.g.
Removing actuators caused by maloperation, lack of maintenance or improper use cannot be
If actuators powered by an external source of energy (electric, ruled out completely.
pneumatic, hydraulic) need to be removed from the valves or dismantled, All repair and maintenance work shall be performed by skilled, properly
the energy supply must be shut down prior to starting any work and the trained personnel using suitable tools and original spare parts. We
instructions in sections 3, 8.1 and the operating manual of the actuator recommend to have this work performed by our service personnel.
must be observed. The safety instructions in Sections 3 and 8 must be complied with.
Actuators with integrated spring mechanism cannot be dismantled.
9.2 Faults / malfunctions > Remedies
Pre-loaded springs!
Caution • Leakage at the seat / disc interface
Valve types BOA-SuperCompactR,
For any queries please contact the nearest KSB sales branch.
BOA-CompactR, BOA-CompactR EKB:
8.2 Maintenance > Rework not possible, replace valve.
All valve components have been designed to be largely Valve types BOAR-H, BOAR-R:
maintenance-free. The materials of the moving parts have been selected > The seat / disc contact faces on the body and valve disc can be
for minimum wear. To ensure operating reliability and to reduce repair reworked using a suitable reseating tool after the bonnet bolting
costs, all valves should however be checked regularly, i. e. they should (902/920/901) has been undone. Re-grind the seat / disc contact faces
be actuated (opened / closed) at least once or twice a year, in particular until they are consistently smooth and even (continuous ground surface).
those valves which are rarely used or difficult to access. Valve types BOAR-H (variant: PFTE disc), BOAR-W:
The operator / user is responsible for fixing appropriate inspection and > Replace the seal ring at the disc (350) (BOAR-H) or the complete disc
servicing intervals as required by the service conditions of the valves. (BOAR-W) after having removed the bonnet bolting (902/920 or 901).
The service life of valves, no matter whether they require maintenance 901).
or not, can be prolonged by: • Leakage at bonnet / body joint
-- Lubricating the moving parts such as stem (200) and stem nut (925) Valve types BOAR-H, BOAR-R, BOAR-S and BOAR-W:
using standardized lubricants to DIN 51825.
> Re-tighten the bonnet / cover bolting (902/920 or 901)
-- Replacing the bonnet / cover joint ring (411/412) by a new one in due
time. > Fit new joint ring (411) or O-ring (412) after having removed the
bonnet / cover bolting (902/920 or 901). Clean the sealing surfaces
The safety instructions in Sections 3, 8.1 and the instructions in Section 9 carefully before inserting a new joint ring or O-ring.
must be complied with.
Do not use additional sealing agents for non-asbestos
Caution
8.3 Testing overhauled valves joint rings. With anti-adhesive coatings, only use
After re-assembly (using original spare parts) and prior to agents explicitly recommended by the seal element manufacturer.
commissioning / start-up, the overhauled valves must be subjected to For any queries please contact the nearest KSB sales branch.
shell / pressure and leak tests to DIN 3230, Part 3 (not applicable to
BOAR-S) .
17
Hoisting the valve for installation into horizontal pipeline (Examples)
Fig. 1, 2
Straps 1 and 2 must be tied around the valve body. To hold the valve in the position shown below and to avoid tilting, both straps should be routed
to the lifting hook between the handwheel arms.
Fig. 3, 4
Straps 1 and 2 must be tied around the valve body. The third strap serves to keep the valve in horizontal position.
Strap 1
Strap 2 Strap 1 Strap 2
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Strap 1 Strap 1
Strap 2 Strap 3
Strap 2 Strap 3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Strap 1
Strap 3
Strap 1
Strap 2
Strap 3 Strap 2
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
18
19
Subject to technical modification without prior notice
01.09.2007
0570.8/21-10
KSB Aktiengesellschaft
Johann-Klein-Strasse 9 • 67227 Frankenthal (Germany)
Tel.: +49 6233 86-0 • fax: +49 6233 86-3439 • e-mail: valves@ksb.com • www.ksb.com
Type series booklet
7150.1/8-10 BOA®-H
Maintenance-free
metal-seated
globe valves
with bellows
Application Variants
• Hot-water heating systems DIN 4751 • Throttling plug for DN > 100
• High temperature hot-water heating systems DIN 4752 • Plug with PTFE seal ring (max. 200 °C, throttling plugs DN
• Heat transfer systems DIN 4754 15-100, on/off plugs DN 125--200)
• Pressure vessel equipment as per AD 2000 code 1) • Lead-sealable cap against unauthorized closing
• Other fluids on request • Pilot plug design from DN 200
1) Please contact KSB for limitations imposed by the applicable • Grey aluminium high-temperature resistant paint for
technical codes. applications > 200 °C
• Oil and grease-free design
Operating data • Special flange designs
• Temperature range:
• Bolts having high impact strength at low temperature
--10 up to +300 °C for EN-GJL-250, JL 1040 *)
down to --30 °C (only for JS 1025)
--10 up to +350 °C for EN-GJS-400-18-LT, JS 1025 *) • certification to customer specification
• Max. operating pressure: up to 16 bar
(up to 25 bar for EN-GJS-400-18-LT, JS 1025) Additional information
Materials • Valve characteristics 7150.4
Body: • Chemical resistance chart 7150.2
• Straight-way pattern: • Operating instructions 0570.8
Lamellar graphite cast iron EN-GJL-250, JL 1040 • Type-tested to the specifications of Germanischer Lloyd
Nodular cast iron EN-GJS-400-18-LT, JS 1025
• Angle pattern: On all inquiries/orders please specify
Lamellar graphite cast iron EN-GJL-250, JL 1040 Globe valve
• For further details see table of materials 1. BOAR-H according to type series booklet 7150.1
Standard design 2. PN 16 or PN 25
3. EN-GJL-250, JL 1040 or EN-GJS-400-18-LT, JS 1025
• Straight-way or angle pattern with straight seat
4. Straight-way or angle pattern (angle pattern only in
• Throttling plug up to DN 100 (> DN 100: on/off plug)
EN-GJL-250, JL 1040
• Position indicator, locking device and travel stop for all valve
5. DN 15-350 (DN 350 only in EN-GJS-400-18-LT, JS 1025
sizes
6. Variant
• Compact bonnet
• Maintenance-free stem sealed by bellows and back-up gland
*) For operating temperatures > 200 °C and uninsulated val
packing
ves please use the valve variant with high--temperature re
• Non-rising handwheel
sistant paint.
• Flanges to DIN EN 1092-2 type 21
• Free from asbestos, PCB and CFC
• Exterior finish: blue RAL 5002
The valves meet the safety requirements of the Pressure The valves do not have a potential internal source of ignition
Equipment Directive 97/23/EC (PED) of annex I for fluids of and can be used in potentially explosive atmospheres,
the groups 1 and 2. group II, category 2 (zones 1+21) and category 3 (zones
2+22) according to ATEX 94/9/EC.
PED 97/23/EC
BOAR-H
offset by 90°
Illustrated: DN 100
Materials
Part No. Description DN Material/Material designation Material No.
15--300 EN-GJL-250 JL1040
100 Body
15--350 EN-GJS-400-18-LT JS1025
15--300 EN-GJL-250 JL1040
161 Bonnet
15--350 EN-GJS-400-18-LT JS1025
15--150 X 20 Cr 13 1.4021+QT (1.4021)
350 Valve plug
200--350 C 22 / X 15 CrNi 18 8 1.0402 / 1.4370
411 Gasket CRNiSt-graphite
440 Bellows set comprising:
200 Stem Stainless steel (min. 13% Cr)
401 Welding ring Stainless steel
442 Bellows X 6 CrNiTi 18 10 1.4541
454 Gland ring Stainless steel
45--6 Gland bolt Steel
461 Gland packing Pure graphite
474 Thrust ring Stainless steel
515 Seat ring Stainless steel
543 Spacer bush 15-65 Glass fibre reinforced plastic
15--150 Glass-fibre reinforced plastic, impact resistant
580 Cap
200--350 Steel
901 Hex. head bolt 8.8 for EN-GJL-250
902 Stud CK 35 V for EN-GJS-400-18-LT
920 Hex. nut C35 for EN-GJS-400-18-LT
916 Plug Plastic
925 Stem nut Steel, coated
15--150 Aluminium die-cast
961 Handwheel
200--350 EN-GJL-250 JL1040
2
BOAR-H
Dimensions PN 16
3
BOAR-H
Dimensions PN 25
4
BOAR-H
Standard-equipped
position indicator with
travel stop located
outside the insulation
Non-rotating stem, Your benefit
protected external • Position of valve plug can be
thread identified at any time
• Valve can be exactly set to its
Your benefit
original position after closing
• High operating reliability
Standard-equipped
locking device
Your benefit
• Protection against
Bellows welded to the accidental valve actuation
stem
Your benefit
• No vibrations transmitted
from plug to bellows
Variants
Throttling plug with Throttling plug from Pilot plug design from DN 200 Lead-sealable cap
PTFE seal ring, DN 125
DN 15-100
5
BOAR-H
Colour coded
position indicator
Your benefit
• Valve plug type can be identified
externally, without removing the
insulation
• Guards against incorrect plug
replacement
Back-up gland packing of
pure graphite, e. g. for heat
transfer systems to DIN 4754
Your benefit
• Extra safety in the event of a
Non-rising handwheel bellows failure
Your benefit
• Ideal in confined spaces
6
BOAR-H
KSB Aktiengesellschaft
Johann-Klein-Strasse 9 • 67227 Frankenthal (Germany)
Tel.: +49 6233 86-0 • fax: +49 6233 86-3439 • e-mail: valves@ksb.com • www.ksb.com
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RE51415
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
131
Breather filter RE 51415/02.09
Replaces: 08.08
1/10
RE 51416
Design
Dismountable filter housing for ventilation with internal, ex-
changeable filter element. Filter elements H10XL up to a filtra-
tion rating of 10 μm with glass fiber mat and P… up to 25 μm
with paper mat.
Materials as per spare parts list.
Designs: TLF I 7-125: with DIN flange,
TLF I…: with internal screw-in thread, TLF I 8-250: with DIN flange,
TLF II…: with external screw-in thread, TLF III 7-125: with DIN flange and filling filter
TLF III…: with external screw-in thread and filling filter (screen basket 130 μm).
(screen basket 130 μm).
Maintenance intervals
Environmental conditions
Fields of application of the filter Maintenance interval
average dust content
General mechanical engineering 9…25 mg/m3 4,000 h
Heavy industry 50…80 mg/m3 3,000 h
Mobile hydraulics 30…100 mg/m3 3,000 h
S 0 0 0 00 0 0
Design
Tank breather filter... Complementary
with internal thread details
connection = TLF I… 0= without
with external thread Material
connection = TLF II… 0= Standard
with external thread connection
and filling screen = TLF III… Seal
0= Polyurethane adhesive
Nom. size M= NBR seal
TLF I, II, III… = 1-25 2-32 3-40
4-50 5-65 6-80 Connection
00 = Standard
Filtration rating in µm
nominal Clogging indicator
Paper, non-cleanable 0= without
P10, P25 = P… Bypass valve
absolute (ISO 16889) 0= without
Micro glass, non-cleanable
H10XL = H10XL
Pressure differential
Max. admissible pressure differential of the filter element
Standard =S
Element model
Standard adhesive T = 80 °C = 0…
Standard material = …0
Solenoid Ordering example:
without =0 TLF III 3 - 40 P10-S00-000-00M00
7. S 0
Filter element
Design = 7. Seal
Filter element size 0= Polyurethane adhesive
NG1-25, 2-32 = 002 M= NBR seal
NG3-40, 4-50, 5-65 = 004 Bypass valve
NG6-80 = 006 0= without
Filtration rating in µm Element model
nominal 0… = Standard adhesive T = 80 °C
Paper, non-cleanable …0 = Standard material
P10, P25 = P…
absolute (ISO 16889)
Micro glass, non-cleanable
H10XL = H10XL
Pressure differential
Max. admissible pressure differential of the filter element Ordering example:
Standard =S 7.004 P10-S00-0-M
4/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics TLF I…; TLF II…; TLF III… RE 51415/02.09
S 0 0 0 00 M 0 0
Design
Tank breather filter with Complementary
DIN flange connection = TLF I… details
Tank breather filter with 0= without
DIN flange connection
Material
and filling screen = TLF III…
0= Standard
Nom. size
Seal
TLF I, III = 7-125 M= NBR seal
TLF I = 8-250
Connection
Filtration rating in µm 00 = Standard
nominal
Paper, non-cleanable Clogging indicator
P10, P25 = P… 0= without
absolute (ISO 16889) Bypass valve
Micro glass, non-cleanable 0= without
H10XL = H10XL
Pressure differential
Max. admissible pressure differential of the filter ele-
ment
Standard =S
Element model
Standard adhesive T = 80 °C = 0…
Standard material = …0 Ordering example:
Solenoid TLF III 7 - 125 P10-S00-000-00M00
without =0
7. S 0 M
Filter element
Design = 7. Seal
Filter element size M= NBR seal
NG7-125 = 007 Bypass valve
NG8-250 = 008 0= without
Filtration rating in µm Element model
nominal 0… = Standard adhesive T = 80 °C
Paper, non-cleanable …0 = Standard material
P10, P25 = P…
absolute (ISO 16889)
Micro glass, non-cleanable
H10XL = H10XL
Pressure differential
Max. admissible pressure differential of the filter element Ordering example:
Standard =S 7.007 P10-S00-0-M
RE 51415/02.09 TLF I…; TLF II…; TLF III… Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 5/10
TLF II…
Size Weight A B C D E F G H J K SW
in kg
TLF I 1-25 0.5 G1 53
Ø 104 24 Ø 92 43
TLF I 2-32 0.6 G 114/ 63
TLF I 3-40 2.1 G 112/
— — — — —
TLF I 4-50 2.1 Ø 177 46 Ø 162 G2 90 80
TLF I 5-65 2.1 G 212/
TLF I 6-80 2.4 Ø 210 45 Ø 190 G3 88 78
TLF II 1-25 0.6 G1 53 46
Ø 104 24 Ø 92 25 43 6
TLF II 2-32 0.7 G 114/ 63 55
TLF II 3-40 2.3 G 112/ 60
— — 26 7
TLF II 4-50 2.3 Ø 177 46 Ø 162 G2 90 80 75
TLF II 5-65 2.3 28 G212/ 8 90
TLF II 6-80 2.7 Ø 210 45 Ø 190 30 G3 88 78 9 105
TLF III 1-25 0.7 Ø 28 107 G1 53 46
Ø 104 24 Ø 92 25 43 6
TLF III 2-32 0.8 Ø 34 131 G 114/ 63 55
TLF III 3-40 2.5 Ø 42 155 G 112/ 60
26 7
TLF III 4-50 2.5 Ø 177 46 Ø 162 Ø 53 185 G2 90 80 75
TLF III 5-65 2.5 Ø 67 217 28 G 212/ 8 90
TLF III 6-80 2.8 Ø 210 45 Ø 190 Ø 82 254 30 G3 88 78 9 105
RE 51415/02.09 TLF I…; TLF II…; TLF III… Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 7/10
Flange Flange
Hole pattern
Hole pattern
TLF I 8-250
Flange
Hole pattern
8/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics TLF I…; TLF II…; TLF III… RE 51415/02.09
10 10
Air resistance [mbar] →
XL
5
XL
H3
H3
XL
L
3
0X
3
H10
H1
2 2
P10
G10
G10
P10
1 1
1 2 3 5 10 20 30 5 10 20 30 60 100
Air flow [m3/h] → Air flow [m3/h] →
TLF…5-65 TLF…6-80
20 20
10 10
Air resistance [mbar] →
XL
H3
5 5
L
L
0X
0X
H1
H1
3 3
P10
2 2
0
P1
0
G10
G1
1 1
10 20 30 50 100 200 300 10 20 30 50 100 200 300
Air flow [m3/h] → Air flow [m3/h] →
TLF…7-125 TLF…8-250
20 20
10 10
Air resistance [mbar] →
XL
XL
H3
H3
5 5
L
XL
0X
H10
H1
3 3
P10
2 2
P10
0
G10
G1
1 1
10 20 30 50 100 200 300 500 1000 200 300 500 1000 2000 3000 5000
Air flow [m3/h] → Air flow [m3/h] →
RE 51415/02.09 TLF I…; TLF II…; TLF III… Hydraulics Bosch Rexroth AG 9/10
Notes
10/10 Bosch Rexroth AG Hydraulics TLF I…; TLF II…; TLF III… RE 51415/02.09
Notes
Bosch Rexroth Filtration Systems GmbH © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other informa-
Hardtwaldstraße 43, 68775 Ketsch, Germany tion set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth AG. It
POB 1120, 68768 Ketsch, Germany may not be reproduced or given to third parties without its consent.
Phone +49 (0) 62 02 / 6 03-0 The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No state-
Fax +49 (0) 62 02 / 6 03-1 99 ments concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain applica-
brfs-support@boschrexroth.de tion can be derived from our information. The information given does not
www.eppensteiner.de release the user from the obligation of own judgment and verification. It
must be remembered that our products are subject to a natural process
of wear and aging.
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85.6157.29
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
132
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E 14 Attaching Parts
Meas. tubing
Measuring connection
Voith Article No.: 41417048
Type: EMA 3 R1/4
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3626-010430
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
133
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E
Table of contents
Appendix_A_
Preservation method and instructions for storage after delivery 3625-006714
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164
1
mlb 137
This regulation contains an overview of preservation methods, storage and inspections of machines and assemblies after delivery, as well
as general instructions.
unpacked
max.3 x
installation
preserved see 1.
acc. to 3625-006212
point 4 for 12 or
24 months
in air-conditioned in non-air-condi- in the open
hall see 1.1 tioned hall see 1.2 see 1.3
S t o r a g e I n s t a l l a t i o n
see 2. System installed, not in operation or at standstill > 24 hrs see 3.
in air-conditioned in non-air- in the open in hall with constant in hall with varying in the open
storage room, rel. conditioned air temperature air temperature
humidity < 40% storage room
see 2.1 see 2.2 see 2.3 see 3.1 see 3.2 see 3.3
Replacing:
3625-006714, 2004-06-01
2008-01-16; airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim - Postfach 1555 x 3625-006714en
airev - KHi Tel. +49 7951 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Rev. 1 Page 1/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
General
Voith units and their assemblies are high quality investment goods whose perfect condition is to be
preserved during installation and assembly work, long periods of storage and after installation or in
cases of standstill for operational reasons. The measures necessary during these phases and the
necessary inspections are described in the following. The work carried out is to be documented.
When carried out carefully, the storage and preservation procedures described are suitable for
maintaining the perfect condition of the deliveries in the period between dispatch from Voith
Crailsheim and commissioning.
In addition to protection of the external corrodible surfaces by applying film forming, water
displacing anticorrosive agents, the measures described are based on the creation of a dry, or
alternatively a dry and oxygen-free climate in the interior of the units. The aim is to achieve and
maintain relative air humidity in the interior =< 40%, as below this air humidity no corrosion occurs.
The following can be used to create the dry climate in the interior of the units:
- sorption air dehumidifiers
- dry compressed air
- technical nitrogen with a sufficiently low dew point
Assemblies, such as gear stages, are to be treated as exposed external iron parts and are
generally to be stored packed in accordance with Voith no. 3625-006212 points 2 – 4 or in air-
conditioned rooms, unless agreed otherwise, or delivered in special containers for long-term
storage.
- Installation is to be carried out preferably in buildings but at least under a roof or tent
providing protection against weather conditions.
- For assembly purposes, cleaned exposed external iron surfaces are to be sprayed on the
same day with a film forming anticorrosive agent, e.g. Shell Ensis Fluid S, or to be painted.
- Do not unpack cold units (below dew point) in warm rooms but only after temperature
equalisation.
Attention: When installing in rooms, do not use nitrogen for protection against corrosion due to
toxic hazard!
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 2/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
If one of the conditions stated is not met, the measures according to point 1.2 for “Non-air-
conditioned hall” are to be applied.
Spray exposed iron parts with a film forming, water displacing anticorrosive agent, e.g.
Shell Ensis Fluid S. (Clean surfaces of the units sprayed with preserving agents with a
suitable cleaning agent, white spirit or paraffin before fitting or mounting parts, e.g.
tightening hubs). After fitting or mounting parts, re-coat remaining exposed iron surfaces
with anticorrosive agent, spray or coat with paint.
To protect the interiors of the units against corrosion during installation, the following
methods are recommended:
a) Dehumidification of the air in the interior of the units with sorption air humidifier.*
- Provided no covers, flanges etc. of the units are opened, the air in the interior of the
machine is to be dried every 3 days with a sorption air dehumidifier. Permissible
relative residual humidity =< 20%. The ventilation filter is to be sealed with a plastic
film.
- After opening the housing by removing covers, flanges etc., the interior of the unit is to
be dried immediately with a sorption air dehumidifier. *
Unscrewed covers, flanges etc. are to be refitted as quickly as possible, at least after
½ hour, or replaced by provisional covers, to reduce the penetration of humidity to an
unavoidable minimum.
The permanent supply of the interior of the unit with dehumidified air via a sorption air
dehumidifier is permitted. It is recommended to control the unit with a hygrostat. The
relative air humidity in the interior of the machine should be =< 40%.
b) Supply of the interior of the unit with dry compressed air. Volume flow approx. 5 to 10
l/min (sufficient for up to 6m³ volume of the interior). The atmospheric dew point of the
compressed air must be below -5°C.
- Provided no covers, flanges etc. of the unit are opened, the interior of the machine is
to be filled after with dry compressed air every 3 days. The purging process is to be
carried out with at least 5 times the volume of the interior.
- After opening covers, flanges etc., the interior of the unit is to be flowed through
immediately with dry compressed air.
* see page 12
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 3/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
Unscrewed covers, flanges etc. are to be refitted as quickly as possible, at least after
½ hour, or replaced by provisional covers, to reduce the penetration of humidity to an
unavoidable minimum.
The permanent supply of the interior of the unit with dry compressed air is permitted. The
atmospheric dew point of the compressed air must be below -5°C.
If one of the conditions stated is not met, the measures according to point 1.3 for “In the
open” are to be applied.
Spray exposed iron parts with a film forming, water displacing anticorrosive agent, e.g.
Shell Ensis Fluid S. (Clean surfaces of the units sprayed with preserving agents with a
suitable cleaning agent, white spirit or paraffin before fitting or mounting parts, e.g.
tightening hubs). After fitting or mounting parts, re-coat remaining exposed iron surfaces
with anticorrosive agent, spray or coat with paint.
To protect the interiors of the units against corrosion during installation, the following
methods are recommended:
a) Dehumidification of the air in the interior of the units with sorption air humidifier.*
- Provided no covers, flanges etc. of the units are opened, the air in the interior of the
machine is to be dried every 3 days with a sorption air dehumidifier. Permissible
relative residual humidity =< 15%. The ventilation filter is to be sealed with a plastic
film.
- After opening the housing by removing covers, flanges etc., the interior of the unit is to
be dried immediately with a sorption air dehumidifier. *
Unscrewed covers, flanges etc. are to be replaced by provisional covers immediately to
reduce the penetration of humidity to an unavoidable minimum.
The permanent supply of the interior of the unit with dehumidified air via a sorption air
dehumidifier is permitted. It is recommended to control the unit with a hygrostat. The
relative air humidity in the interior of the machine should be =< 40%.
b) Supply of the interior of the unit with dry compressed air. Volume flow approx. 10 to
15 l/min (sufficient for up to 6m³ volume of the interior). The atmospheric dew point of
the compressed air must be below -10°C.
*see page 12
- Provided no covers, flanges etc. of the units are opened, the air in the interior of the
machine is to be dried every 3 days with a sorption air dehumidifier. The ventilation
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 4/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
filter is to be sealed with a plastic film. The purging process is to be carried out with at
least 5 times the volume of the interior.
- After opening the housing by removing covers, flanges etc., the interior of the unit is to
be dried immediately with dry compressed air.
Unscrewed covers, flanges etc. are to be replaced by provisional covers immediately to
reduce the penetration of humidity to an unavoidable minimum.
Permanent supply of the interiors of the unit with dry compressed air is permitted (10 –
15 l/min). The atmospheric dew point of the compressed air must be below -10°C.
Installation of the units and work during which covers, flanges etc. are unscrewed, are to be
carried out under a roof or in a tent.
Spray exposed iron parts with a film forming, water displacing anticorrosive agent, e.g.
Shell Ensis Fluid S. (Clean surfaces of the units sprayed with preserving agents with a
suitable cleaning agent, white spirit or paraffin before fitting or mounting parts, e.g.
tightening hubs). After fitting or mounting parts, re-coat remaining exposed iron surfaces
with anticorrosive agent, spray or coat with paint.
To protect the interiors of the units against corrosion during installation, the following
methods are recommended:
a) - permanent supply of the interiors of the units with dehumidified air with
sorption air dehumidifier.*
- Unscrewed covers, flanges etc. are to be replaced by provisional covers immediately to
reduce the penetration of humidity to an unavoidable minimum.
b) - permanent supply of the interiors of the machines with dry compressed air.
Atmospheric dew point of the compressed air =< - 40°C.
Volume flow approx. 10-15 l/min (sufficient for up to 6m³ volume of the interior)
- Unscrewed covers, flanges etc. are to be replaced by provisional covers immediately to
reduce the penetration of humidity to an unavoidable minimum.
c) - permanent supply of the interiors of the machines with technical nitrogen, volume flow
approx. 10 – 15 l/min. (sufficient for up to 6 m³ volume of the interior), required
pressure approx. 0.002 bar. Dew point of nitrogen =< -70°C.
Attention: All works on the unit must be performed under special safety measures
when using nitrogen.
Toxic hazard!
* see page 12
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 5/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
• The storage room should be dry, with low dust levels, moderately ventilated and free of
vibrations.
• The basic condition for storage is that no aggressive media, such as gases, vapours or
aerosols of acids, alkaline solutions or salts can act upon the machines.
• Ensure sufficient stability, also on inclined surfaces.
• Packed machines must only be stacked or placed on top of one another in such a way that
the air circulation is maintained.
• All machines must be easily accessible for inspection and maintenance work for:
- reading off moisture indicators
- inspection of the machines
- repairs to packaging
• Do not unpack cold machines (below dew point) in warm rooms, but only after temperature
equalisation.
• Filling or permanent supply of machines with nitrogen is not permitted in rooms due to toxic
hazard.
• Unpacked machines may only be stored in the open if they are intended for outside
installation.
• The storage temperature should be within the range 0 to 40 °C.
• The storage area must be free of vibrations. It should preferably have a sturdy foundation,
e.g. concrete slab, it must at least be safe against flooding and fixed in such a way that the
machines and components do not sink into the mud even during long periods of rain. The
formation of puddles and stagnant water are to be avoided. Machines are to be placed on
squared timbers.
• Direct sunlight is to be avoided, as apart from the damaging effect of the ultra-violet
radiation, it leads to great temperature fluctuations.
• Tarpaulins are to be secured against gale-force winds. It must be ensured that no rain can
accumulate and that air circulation is possible under the tarpaulins.
• The condition of the tarpaulins and packaging is to be inspected regularly for damage due
to weather conditions, rotting and being eaten by animals. Defects are to be remedied
immediately.
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 6/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
See also 2.
unpacked units
The following measures are to be carried out during the period of storage:
- spray external exposed iron parts at least every 2 years with a film forming, water
displacing anticorrosive agent, e.g. Shell Ensis Fluid S. (Clean sprayed surfaces with
white spirit or paraffin before installing the machines).
- turn the shafts of roller bearing units at least every 2 years by approx. a quarter to a half
turn in order to prevent standstill marks (false brinelling) in the roller bearings.
- spray interior surfaces every 2 years with solvent-free anticorrosive agent, e.g. Shell Ensis
engine oil 20.
See also 2.
If one of the conditions stated is not met, the regulations according to point 2.3 for “Storage
in the open” are to be applied.
The following methods can be used to protect the units against corrosion:
a) - Packing in accordance with Voith no. 3625-006212 point 4. It is recommended to check
the efficacy of the drying agent regularly with moisture indicators, see table page 11
- the condition of the packaging is to be checked regularly for damage. Defects are to be
remedied immediately.
- the aluminium compound foil is to be replaced after 2 years. (Aluminium compound foil
is not UV-proof).
The efficacy of the preservation of the exposed iron parts is to be checked.
If necessary, the preservation is to be touched up with a film forming, water displacing
anticorrosive agent, e.g. Shell Ensis Fluid S.
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 7/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
- turn the shafts of roller bearing units at least every 2 years by approx. a quarter to a
half turn in order to prevent standstill marks (false brinelling) in the roller bearings.
b) Unpacked units
permanent supply of the interior of the unit with sorption air dehumidifier.*
- at least after 1 year check external parts for efficacy of the preservation,
if necessary preserve exposed iron parts again with a film forming, water displacing
anticorrosive agent, e.g. Shell Ensis Fluid S.
- turn the shafts of roller bearing units at least every 2 years by approx. a quarter to a
half turn in order to prevent standstill marks (false brinelling) in the roller bearings.
Permanent supply of the interior of the units with dry compressed air may be used as
alternative to the sorption air dehumidifier. Volume flow approx. 10 to 15 l/min (sufficient for
up to 6m³ volume of the interior). The atmospheric dew point of the compressed air must
be below -10°C.
See also 2.
The following methods can be used to protect the units against corrosion:
a) Packaging in accordance with Voith no. 3625-006212 point 4. It is recommended to
check the efficacy of the drying agent regularly with moisture indicators, see table page
11
- after at least 1 year, the exposed external iron parts are to be checked for efficacy of
the preservation. If necessary, the preservation is to be restored with Shell Ensis Fluid
S. (Clean sprayed surfaces with white spirit or paraffin before installing the machines)
- turn the shafts of roller bearing units at least every 2 years by approx. a quarter to a
half turn in order to prevent standstill marks (false brinelling) in the roller bearings.
- the aluminium compound foil is to be replaced after 2 years (Aluminium compound foil
is not UV-proof).
b) unpacked units:
- provide rain protection (roofing, tent, tarpaulin etc.)
- spray exposed iron parts with a film forming, water displacing
anticorrosive agent, e.g. Shell Ensis Fluid S.
For preservation of the interior of the units, the following procedures can be used:
- permanent supply of the interior of the machine with a sorption air dehumidifier.*
- permanent supply of the interior of the machine with technical nitrogen, approx. 10 –
15 l/min (sufficient for up to 6 m³ volume of the interior), required pressure approx.
0.002 bar. Dew point of the nitrogen =< -70°C
* see page 12
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 8/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
- permanent supply of the interior of the unit with dry compressed air.
Atmospheric dew point of the compressed air =< - 70°C.
Volume flow approx. 10-15 l/min (sufficient for up to 6m³ volume of the interior)
Spray exposed external iron parts with film forming, water displacing anticorrosive agent,
e.g. Shell Ensis Fluid S. Grease and move functional parts, e.g. joints, monthly.
Fill systems with operating oil wherever possible, please refer to operating manual.
3.1 The following measures apply to systems installed on the foundation in hall with constant
temperature
The following methods can be used to protect the interiors of the units against corrosion:
a) Operable systems
Start up system at least every 3 months and operate it briefly (approx. 5 minutes) for oil
moistening of the internal parts and surfaces.
b) Non-operable systems
- With operable electrical start-up lubrication pump, this is to be put into operation every
3 months for approx. 5 minutes. (Do not run up to hot condition!)
- With a non-operable electrical start-up lubrication pump, remove oil from the sump
every 3 months, spray through housing openings in the interior and circulate oil by
pumping with separate oil pump through pipelines for approx. 5 minutes. Race system
where possible.
d) Supply of the interior of the unit with dry compressed air. Volume flow approx.
10 to 15 l/min (sufficient for up to 6m³ volume of the interior). The atmospheric dew point
of the compressed air must below 0°C.
* see page 12
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 9/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
3.2 The following measures apply to systems installed on the foundation in a hall with slightly
varying air temperature
The following methods can be used to protect the interiors of the units against corrosion:
a) Operable systems
Start up at least every 2 months and operate briefly ( approx. 5 minutes) for oil
moistening of the internal parts and surfaces.
b) Non-operable systems
- With operable electrical start-up lubrication pump, this is to be put into operation every
2 months for approx. 5 minutes. (Do not run up to hot condition!)
- With a non-operable electrical start-up lubrication pump, remove oil from the sump
every 2 months, spray through housing openings in the interior and circulate oil by
pumping with separate oil pump through pipelines for approx. 5 minutes. Race system
where possible.
d) The permanent supply of the interior of the unit with dehumidified air via a sorption air
dehumidifier is permitted. *
e) Supply of the interior of the unit with dry compressed air. Volume flow approx.
10 to 15 l/min (sufficient for up to 6m³ volume of the interior). The atmospheric dew point
of the compressed air must be below -10°C.
3.3 The following measures apply to systems installed in the open on the foundation
The following methods can be used to protect the interiors of the units against corrosion:
a) The permanent supply of the interior of the unit with dehumidified air via a sorption air
dehumidifier is permitted. It is recommended to control the unit with a hygrostat. The
relative air humidity in the interior of the machine must be =< 40%.
* see page 12
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 10/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
b) - Supply of the interior of the unit with dry compressed air. Volume flow approx.
10 to 15 l/min (sufficient for up to 6m³ volume of the interior). The atmospheric dew
point of the compressed air must be below -40°C.
c) - permanent supply of the interiors of the machines with technical nitrogen, volume flow
approx. 10 – 15 l/min. (sufficient for up to 6 m³ volume of the interior), required
pressure approx. 0.002 bar. Dew point of nitrogen =< -70°C.
Attention: All works on the unit must be performed under special safety measures
when using nitrogen.
Toxic hazard!
With operable electrical start-up lubrication pump, this is to be put into operation every 3 months
for approx. 5 minutes.
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 11/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
* Anticorrosive protection with dehumidified air is based on the fact that no corrosion occurs below
a relative air humidity of 40%. The relative air humidity depends on the temperature.
Permissible residual humidity is to be determined in accordance with the lowest expected ambient
temperature. At this temperature it should be = < 40 %.
The relative permissible air humidity at which the air in the interior of the units is to be dried is
determined with the aid of the hx diagram for humid air (see example).
Example:
See hx diagram for humid air page 13
Assumptions:
- Ambient condition: temperature 30 °C, rel. air humidity 70%
- Lowest expected ambient temperature 18 °C, permissible relative air humidity =< 40%.
Determination of the permissible relative air humidity at which the air is to be dried at 30°C:
- Determine intersection of temperature 30°C and relative air humidity 70% (state of air
before drying)
- Determine intersection of temperature 18°C and relative air humidity 40% (nominal state of
air after drying)
- Read off the corresponding water vapour content for the nominal state of the air: 5g/kg air.
- Read off the intersection with the curve of the relative air humidity on the line for the water vapour
content vertically upwards at approx. 2 to 4°C above the initial temperature (30°C), selected
34°C: 15%.
Pipe diameters vary according to the device used and are to be agreed with the manufacturer of
the sorption dehumidifier.
Process air
Hygrostat Equaliser pipe for leakage air
Line diameters vary according to the device
used.
Diameter of the leakage air equalisation
Leakage VOITH approx. 0.5 x diameter of process air lines.
air
Hygrostat-
controlled air Humid air
dehumidifier
Regeneration air
Dehumidified air
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 12/13
Preservation methods and storage insructions after
delivery for coupling types R, RW, S, MDC and
torque converters, as well as for assemblies
2008-01-16 3625-006714en
airee-TRg Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG - D-74555 Crailsheim Rev. 1
airev-KHi Postfach 15 55 x Tel. (07951) 32-0 x Fax 32-500 Page 13/13
Voith Turbo | Geared variable speed coupling | SEC S17 Vinh Tan II | R 17 K.2E
Table of contents
Appendix_B_
Operating fluids ISO VG 32 for hydrodynamic circuits with gearing 3625-
006073
Techn. Documentation No. 216000516-0410_en, Version 1, airpd-cra_SPa
Serial No. 8208163 to 8208164